Form 485BPOS VARIABLE ANNUITY ACCOUNT
File Nos. 333-185804
811-07727
811-07727
SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION
Washington, D.C. 20549
Form N-4
REGISTRATION STATEMENT
UNDER
THE SECURITIES ACT OF 1933
UNDER
THE SECURITIES ACT OF 1933
| |
Pre-Effective Amendment No. |
[ ] |
| |
Post-Effective Amendment No. 18 |
[X]
|
and/or
REGISTRATION STATEMENT
UNDER
THE INVESTMENT COMPANY ACT OF 1940
UNDER
THE INVESTMENT COMPANY ACT OF 1940
| |
Amendment No. 18 |
[X]
|
Variable Annuity Account Five
(Exact Name of Registered Separate Account)
American General Life Insurance Company
(Name of Insurance Company)
2727-A Allen Parkway, Houston, Texas 77019
(Address of Insurance Company’s Principal Executive Offices) (Zip
Code)
(800) 871-2000
(Insurance Company’s Telephone Number, including Area Code)
American Home Assurance Company
(Name of Guarantor)
1271 Avenue of the Americas, FL37, New York, NY 10020-1304
(Address of Guarantor’s Principal Executive Offices) (Zip Code)
(212) 770-7000
(Guarantor’s Telephone Number, including Area
Code)
Trina Sandoval, Esq.
American General Life Insurance Company
21650 Oxnard Street, Suite 750, Woodland Hills, California 91367
American General Life Insurance Company
21650 Oxnard Street, Suite 750, Woodland Hills, California 91367
(Name and Address of Agent for Service)
Approximate Date of Proposed Public Offering: Continuous
It is proposed that this filing will become effective:
☐ immediately upon filing pursuant to paragraph (b)
☒ on May
1,
2026 pursuant to paragraph (b)
☐ 60 days after filing pursuant to paragraph (a)(1)
☐ on (date) pursuant to paragraph (a)(1) of Rule 485 under the Securities Act of 1933 (“Securities Act”).
If appropriate, check the following box:
☐ This post-effective amendment designates a new effective date for a
previously filed post-effective amendment.
Check each box that appropriately characterizes the Registrant:
☐ New Registrant (as applicable, a Registered Separate Account or Insurance Company that has not filed a Securities Act registration statement or amendment thereto within 3 years preceding this
filing)
☐ Emerging Growth Company (as defined by Rule 12b-2 under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (“Exchange Act”))
☐ If an Emerging Growth Company, indicate by check mark if the Registrant has elected not to use the extended transition period for complying with any new or revised financial accounting standards provided pursuant to Section 7(a)(2)(B) of Securities Acton (date) pursuant to paragraph (a)(1) of Rule 485 under the Securities Act of 1933 (“Securities Act”).
☐ Insurance Company relying on Rule 12h-7 under the Exchange Act
☐ Smaller reporting company (as defined by Rule 12b-2 under the Exchange
Act)
Title of Securities
Being Registered: Units of interest in flexible premium deferred variable annuity contracts.
Prospectus
May 1, 2026
Flexible Premium Deferred Variable Annuity Contract
issued by
American General Life Insurance
Company
in all states except New York
in connection with
VARIABLE ANNUITY ACCOUNT FIVE
This variable annuity has several investment choices - Variable Portfolios (which are subaccounts of the separate account) and
available Fixed Account options. Each Variable Portfolio invests exclusively in shares of one of the Underlying Funds listed in Appendix A to this prospectus. Please see APPENDIX A - INVESTMENT OPTIONS AVAILABLE UNDER THE CONTRACT for additional information about the Variable Portfolios and the
Fixed Account options.
This contract is no longer available for purchase by new contract Owners.
Please read this prospectus carefully and keep it for future reference. It contains important information about the variable
annuity, including a description of all material features of the
contract.
The contract is not a short-term investment and is not appropriate for investors who plan or need to take withdrawals or surrender the contract during the first seven (or the first nine years for contracts with the Seasons Rewards Feature) contract years due to application of Withdrawal Charges. Withdrawals could also result in taxes and tax penalties. The contract is a complex investment and involves risks, including potential loss of principal. You should speak with your financial representative about the contract's features, benefits, risks, and fees.
The Company's obligations under the contracts are subject to its financial strength and claims paying ability.
The Company's obligations under the contracts are subject to its financial strength and claims paying ability.
These securities have not been approved or disapproved by the SEC, nor any state securities commission, nor has the SEC passed
upon the accuracy or adequacy of this prospectus. Any representation to the contrary is a criminal offense.
Additional information about certain investment products, including variable annuities, has been prepared by the SEC’s staff and is available at www.Investor.gov.
Inquiries: If you have questions about your contract, call your financial representative or contact us at Annuity Service Center, P.O. Box 15570, Amarillo, Texas 79105-5570. Telephone Number: (800) 445-7862 and website
(www.corebridgefinancial.com/annuities).
Please see ALLOCATION OF PURCHASE PAYMENTS in this prospectus for the address to which you must send Purchase Payments.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
| Glossary |
3 |
| 4 | |
| 4 | |
| 4 | |
| 4 | |
| 6 | |
| 9 | |
| 9 | |
| 9 | |
| 9 | |
| 11 | |
| 12 | |
| 13 | |
| 14 | |
| 15 | |
| 17 | |
| 17 | |
| 17 | |
| 18 | |
| 18 | |
| 18 | |
| 19 | |
| 19 | |
| 19 | |
| 19 | |
| 20 | |
| 20 | |
| 21 | |
| 22 | |
| 22 | |
| 23 | |
| 25 | |
| 25 | |
| 25 | |
| 26 | |
| 26 | |
| 28 | |
| 28 | |
| 29 | |
| 29 | |
| 30 | |
| 31 | |
| 31 | |
| 37 | |
| 40 | |
| 41 | |
| 43 | |
| 43 | |
| 44 | |
| 45 | |
| 46 | |
| 46 | |
| 47 | |
| 47 | |
| 48 | |
| 49 | |
| 49 | |
| 50 | |
| 50 | |
| 50 | |
| 51 | |
| 51 | |
| 51 | |
| 51 | |
| 51 | |
| 51 | |
| 51 |
| 51 | |
| 52 | |
| 53 | |
| 53 | |
| 54 | |
| 55 | |
| 55 | |
| 55 | |
| 55 | |
| 56 | |
| 59 | |
| 63 | |
| 64 | |
| 64 | |
| 64 | |
| 64 | |
| 64 | |
| 64 | |
| 65 | |
| 65 | |
| 65 | |
| 65 | |
| 66 | |
| A-1 | |
| B-1 | |
| C-1 | |
| D-1 | |
| E-1 | |
| F-1 |
2
Glossary
We have capitalized some of the technical terms used in this prospectus. To help you understand these terms, we have defined them in this glossary.
Accumulation Phase - The period during which you invest money in your contract.
Accumulation Units - A measurement we use to calculate the value of the variable portion of your contract during the
Accumulation Phase.
Annuitant - The person on whose life we base annuity income payments after you begin the Income Phase.
Annuity Date - The date you select on which annuity income payments begin.
Annuity Units - A measurement we use to calculate the amount of annuity income payments you receive from the
variable portion of your contract during the Income Phase.
Beneficiary - The person you designate to receive any benefits under the contract if you or, in the case of a
non-natural Owner, the Annuitant dies. If your contract is jointly owned, you and the
joint Owner are each other’s primary Beneficiary.
Company - Refers to American General Life Insurance Company (“AGL”), the insurer that issues the contract. The term “we,” “us” and “our” are also used to identify the
Company.
Continuation Contribution - An amount by which the death benefit that would have been paid to the spousal Beneficiary upon the death of the original Owner exceeds the contract value as of the Good Order date. We will
contribute this amount, if any, to the contract value upon spousal continuation.
Continuing Spouse - Spouse of original contract Owner at the time of death who elects to continue the contract after the death of the original contract
Owner.
Feeder Funds - Each of the following Feeder Funds invests exclusively in shares of a corresponding Master Fund:
SA American Funds Global Growth, SA American Funds Growth, and SA American Funds
Growth-Income Variable Portfolios.
Fixed Account - An account, if available, in which
you may invest money and earn a fixed rate of return. Fixed Accounts are obligations of
the General Account.
Fund-of-Funds - An Underlying Fund that pursues its investment goal by investing its assets in a combination of other Underlying Funds. Each Managed
Allocation Portfolio is structured as a Fund-of-Funds, investing its assets in a
combination of Variable Portfolios.
General Account - The Company’s account, which includes any amounts you have allocated to available Fixed
Accounts, including any interest credited thereon, and amounts owed under your contract
for death and/or Living Benefits which are in excess of portions of contract value allocated to the Variable Portfolios.
Good Order - Fully and accurately completed forms and/or Instructions, including any necessary documentation,
applicable to any given transaction or request received by us.
Income Phase - The period upon annuitization during
which we make annuity income payments to you.
Insurable Interest - Evidence that the Owner(s), Annuitant(s) or Beneficiary(ies) will suffer a financial loss at
the death of the life that triggers the death benefit. Generally, we consider an
interest insurable if a familial relationship and/or an economic interest exists. A familial relationship generally includes those persons related by blood or by law. An economic interest exists when the
Owner has a lawful and substantial economic interest in having the life, health or bodily
safety of the insured life preserved.
Latest Annuity Date - The first NYSE business day of the month following your 95th birthday or tenth contract anniversary, whichever is later.
Market Close - The close of the New York Stock Exchange on business days, excluding holidays, usually at 1:00
p.m. Pacific Time.
Master Funds - Funds of the American Funds Insurance Series in which the Feeder Funds invest.
Non-Qualified (contract) - A contract purchased with after-tax dollars. In general, these contracts are not under any pension plan, specially sponsored program or
individual retirement account (“IRA”).
NYSE - New York Stock Exchange.
Owner - The person or entity (if a non-natural Owner) with an interest or title to this contract. The term
“you” or “your” are also used to identify the Owner.
Payment Enhancement(s) - The amount(s) allocated to
your contract by us under the Seasons Rewards Program. Payment Enhancements are calculated as a percentage of your Purchase Payments and are considered earnings.
Purchase Payments - The money you give us to buy and invest in the contract.
Purchase Payments Limit - $1,000,000.
Qualified (contract) - A contract purchased with pretax dollars. These contracts are generally purchased under a pension plan, specially sponsored program or IRA.
Separate Account - A segregated asset account maintained by the Company separately from the Company’s General
Account. The Separate Account consists of Variable Portfolios or subaccounts, each
investing in shares of the Underlying Funds.
Trusts - Collectively refers to the Fidelity® Variable Insurance Products Trust, Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust, Seasons Series Trust, SunAmerica Series
Trust and T. Rowe Price Equity Series, Inc.
Underlying Funds - The underlying investment portfolios of the Trusts in which the Variable Portfolios invest.
Variable Portfolio(s) - Refers to the Premier Portfolios, Select Portfolios, Focused Portfolios, Managed Allocation Portfolios and/or Seasons Strategies. The
Variable Portfolios, which are subaccounts of the Separate Account, invest in the Underlying Funds of the Seasons Series Trust, SunAmerica Series Trust, Fidelity® Variable Insurance Products Trust, Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust and T. Rowe Price Equity Series, Inc.
3
OVERVIEW OF THE CONTRACT
Purpose of the Contract
The contract is designed to help you invest on a tax-deferred basis, meet long-term financial goals, and plan for your retirement. You can accumulate
assets by investing in the contract’s investment options and then later convert
those accumulated assets into a stream of guaranteed income payments from us. The
contract includes certain death benefit options that may help financially protect your
beneficiaries in the event of your death. Optional Living Benefits may also be
available under the contract, which are designed to help you achieve your financial goals and protect against certain financial risks.
This contract may be appropriate for you if you have a long investment time horizon and the contract’s terms and conditions are consistent with your
financial goals. It is not intended for people whose liquidity needs require early or
frequent withdrawals or for people who intend to frequently trade in the
contract’s Variable Portfolios.
Phases of the Contract
Like all deferred annuities, the contract has two phases: (1) the Accumulation Phase (for savings)
and (2) the Income Phase (for income).
Accumulation Phase. During the Accumulation Phase, you invest the money under your contract in one or more available investment options to help you build assets on a tax-deferred basis. The available
investment options may include:
•
Variable Portfolios. When you invest in a Variable Portfolio, you are indirectly investing in the Variable Portfolio’s Underlying Fund. The Underlying Funds have different investment objectives, strategies, and risks. You can gain or lose money if you invest in a Variable
Portfolio.
Additional information about each Underlying Fund is provided in an appendix to this prospectus. Please see APPENDIX A - INVESTMENT OPTIONS AVAILABLE UNDER THE CONTRACT.
Additional information about each Underlying Fund is provided in an appendix to this prospectus. Please see APPENDIX A - INVESTMENT OPTIONS AVAILABLE UNDER THE CONTRACT.
•
Fixed Accounts. When you invest in a Fixed Account option, your principal is guaranteed and earns interest based on a rate set and guaranteed
by the Company. Additional information about each Fixed Account is provided in an appendix to this prospectus.
Please see APPENDIX A - INVESTMENT OPTIONS AVAILABLE UNDER THE CONTRACT.
The amount of money you accumulate under your contract depends (in part) on the performance of the investment options you choose. You may transfer money
between investment options during the Accumulation Phase, subject to certain
restrictions and possible fees. Your accumulated
assets impact the value of your contract’s benefits during the Accumulation Phase, including
the death benefit and any optional Living Benefits, as well as the amount available for
withdrawal.
Income Phase. When you are ready to receive guaranteed income under the contract, you can switch to the Income
Phase, at which time you will start to receive annuity income payments from us. This is
also referred to as “annuitizing” your contract. You generally decide when to
annuitize your contract, although there are restrictions on the earliest and latest
times that your contract may be annuitized. If you do not annuitize or surrender your
contract before the latest annuitization date, your contract will be automatically
annuitized. Once your contract is annuitized, you will no longer be able to surrender,
take withdrawals of contract value and all other features and benefits of your
contract, including the death benefit, will terminate.
You can choose from the available annuity income
options, which may provide income for life, for an available period of time, or a
combination of both. You can also choose to receive payments on a variable or fixed basis, or some combination of both. If the payments are fixed, the dollar amount of each payment will not change.
If the payments are variable, the dollar amounts for the payments will
fluctuate.
There is no death benefit during the Income Phase. Annuity payments may be payable after death depending on the annuity income option that you selected. You
cannot take withdrawals of contract value or surrender the contract during the Income
Phase. If you own an optional Living Benefit at the time that you annuitize the contract, you may choose to take annuity income payments in accordance with that Living Benefit. Otherwise, your
optional Living Benefit terminates at the beginning of the Income Phase.
Contract Features
Accessing Your Money. You may withdraw money from your contract at any time during the Accumulation Phase. If you make a withdrawal, you may have to pay a withdrawal charge and/or income taxes, including a tax
penalty if you are younger than age 59½.
Withdrawals may negatively impact the value of your contract’s benefits, and may cause an optional Living Benefit to terminate.
Tax Treatment. You can transfer money between investment options without tax implications, and earnings (if any) on your investments are generally
tax-deferred. Earnings are not taxed until they are distributed, which may occur when
making a withdrawal, upon receiving an annuity payment, or upon payment of the death benefit.
Optional Living Benefits. You may be able to elect (or may have elected) one of the optional Living Benefits under
4
the contract for an
additional fee. Certain Living Benefits are no longer available for election, and any Living Benefit that is available must be elected at the time that the contract is purchased. Each Living Benefit is
designed to provide limited protection from unfavorable investment performance during
the Accumulation Phase, and can also provide a guaranteed income stream that may last as long as you live.
Death Benefits. If you die during the Accumulation Phase, the Company pays a death benefit to your beneficiary or
beneficiaries. The contract includes a Standard Death Benefit equal to the greater of
the contract or Net Purchase Payments at no additional charge. If you elect the Maximum
Anniversary Value Death Benefit or the Purchase Payment Accumulation Death Benefit for
an additional fee, a greater amount may be payable upon death.
Additional Features and
Services. Additional features and services under the contract are summarized below.
There are no additional charges associated with these features and services unless
otherwise noted. Not all features and services may be available under your contract.
•
Dollar Cost Averaging (DCA) Fixed Accounts. If you invest in a DCA Fixed Account, interest is credited to amounts allocated to that DCA Fixed Account and your money is systematically transferred from the DCA Fixed Account to one or more investment options over a specified period of
time. Automatic transfers do not count towards the number of free transfers per
contract year.
•
Dollar Cost Averaging (DCA) Program. The DCA program allows you to systematically transfer a specified dollar amount or percentage of contract value from an investment option to one or more
eligible investment options. Automatic transfers do not count towards the number of
free transfers per contract year.
•
Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program. This program allows you to have your investments periodically rebalanced so that the resulting allocations are consistent with your current investment instructions. Automatic rebalances do
not count towards the number of free transfers per contract year.
•
Systematic Withdrawal Program. This program allows you to receive periodic withdrawals from your contract on a monthly, quarterly, semi-annual, or annual basis.
•
Automatic Payment Plan. This program allows you to make automatic subsequent Purchase Payments, once you have contributed at least the minimum initial Purchase Payment.
5
Important Information You Should Consider About the Contract
| |
FEES AND EXPENSES |
Location in
Prospectus | ||
| Are There
Charges or
Adjustments for
Early
Withdrawals? |
Yes.
•For Contracts without Seasons Rewards. If you
withdraw money from your contract within 7 years
following each Purchase Payment, you may be assessed a withdrawal charge of up to 7%, as a percentage of each Purchase Payment withdrawn.
•For Contracts with Seasons Rewards. If you
withdraw money from your contract within 9 years
following your purchase of the contract or your last Purchase Payment, you may be assessed a withdrawal charge of up to 9%, as a percentage of each Purchase Payment
withdrawn.
For example, if you were to withdraw $100,000 during a withdrawal
charge period, you could be assessed a withdrawal charge
of up to $7,000 if your maximum withdrawal charge is 7%
or $9,000 if your maximum withdrawal charge is 9%. This loss will be greater if there are federal and state income taxes or tax-penalties.
Withdrawal Charges do not apply to certain withdrawals including the
withdrawal up to the annual penalty-free withdrawal
amount which equals 10% of your Purchase Payments not
yet withdrawn. |
Expenses –
Withdrawal
Charges | ||
| Are There
Transaction
Charges? |
Yes, in addition to withdrawal charges, you may be charged for other transactions. You will
be charged for each transfer after 15 transfers in any contract year
during the Accumulation Phase. There may also be taxes
on Purchase Payments. |
Expenses | ||
| Are There
Ongoing Fees and
Expenses? |
Yes.
The table below describes the current fees and expenses of the
contract that you may pay each
year, depending on the investment options and optional benefits you choose. Please
refer to your contract data page for information about the specific
fees you will pay each year based on the options you
have elected. |
Expenses | ||
| Annual Fee |
Minimum |
Maximum | ||
| Base Contract1 |
1.42% |
1.42% | ||
| Investment Options2
(Underlying Fund fees and expenses) |
0.46% |
1.76% | ||
| Optional Benefits Available for an
Additional Charge
(For a single optional benefit, if elected) |
0.10%3 |
0.80%4 | ||
| 1 As a percentage of the value in the Separate Account (includes a percentage attributable
to the contract maintenance fee).
2 As a percentage of Underlying Fund net assets. 3 As a percentage of the Income
Benefit Base used to calculate the guaranteed benefit. 4 As a percentage of the MAV Benefit
Base used to calculate the guaranteed benefit. This
represents the maximum charge for the most expensive optional
benefit. Because your contract is customizable, the
choices you make affect how much you will pay. To help
you understand the cost of owning your contract, the following table shows the lowest and highest cost you could pay each year, based on current charges. This estimate
assumes that you do not take withdrawals from the contract, which
could add withdrawal charges that substantially increase
costs. | ||||
| Lowest Annual Cost: $1,660 |
Highest Annual Cost: $3,416 | |||
| Assumes:
•Investment of $100,000 •5% annual appreciation
•Least expensive Underlying Fund fees and expenses •No optional benefits
•No withdrawal charges •No additional Purchase Payments,
transfers, or withdrawals |
Assumes:
•Investment of $100,000 •5% annual appreciation
•Most expensive combination of optional benefits and Underlying Fund fees and expenses •No withdrawal charges
•No additional Purchase Payments, transfers, or withdrawals | |||
6
| |
RISKS |
Location in
Prospectus | ||
| Is There a Risk of
Loss from Poor
Performance? |
Yes. You can lose money by investing in this contract, including possible loss of your
principal investment. |
Principal Risks of
Investing in the
Contract | ||
| Is this a
Short-Term
Investment? |
No.
•This contract is not designed for short-term investing and may not be appropriate for an
investor who needs ready access to cash. As such, you should not use
the contract as a short-term investment or savings
vehicle. •Charges may apply to withdrawals. Withdrawal charges could significantly reduce the
value of your investment or the amount that you receive upon taking a
withdrawal. Withdrawals may also reduce or terminate
contract guarantees and may also be subject to state and
federal income taxes and tax-penalties. •The benefits of tax deferral, long-term income, and optional Living Benefit guarantees
mean that this contract is generally more beneficial to investors with
a long investment time horizon. | |||
| What are the
Risks Associated
with the
Investment
Options? |
•An investment in this contract is subject to the risk of poor investment performance and
can vary depending on the performance of the investment options
available under the contract.
•Each investment option (including each Fixed Account option) has its own unique risks.
•You should review the available investment options before making an investment decision. | |||
| What are the
Risks Related to
the Insurance
Company? |
An investment in the contract is subject to the risks related to us,
American General Life Insurance Company. Any obligations
(including under a Fixed Account option), guarantees,
and benefits of the contract are subject to our claims-paying ability.
An Owner should look solely to our financial strength
for our claims-paying ability. More information about the
Company, including our financial strength ratings, may be obtained at
https://investors.corebridgefinancial.com/financials/Ratings/default.aspx
. | |||
| |
RESTRICTIONS
|
| ||
| Are There Limits
on the Investment
Options? |
Yes.
Transfer Restrictions.
•During the Accumulation Phase, you must transfer at least $100 per transfer between any
of the Variable Portfolios and/or any available Fixed Accounts. If
less than $100 remains in any Variable Portfolio or
Fixed Account after a transfer, that amount must be
transferred as well. Funds already in your contract cannot be
transferred to the DCA Fixed Account, if available. A
transfer request will be priced as of the day it is received before Market Close. If the transfer request is received after Market Close, the request
will be priced as of the next NYSE business day.
•During the Income Phase, only one transfer per month is permitted between the Variable
Portfolios. No other transfers are allowed during the Income Phase.
Transfers will be effected for the last NYSE business
day of the month in which we receive your request for
the transfer. You may not use the DCA Program or the Automatic Asset
Rebalancing Program during the Income
Phase. •Your transfers between the Variable Portfolios are subject to policies designed to deter
frequent and short-term trading.
Investment Restrictions. If you elect an optional Living Benefit, not all investment options may be available and you must invest in accordance with the applicable investment
requirements. You may be required to invest a certain percentage of
your contract value in a certain investment option. We
reserve the right to modify the investment requirements in
the future. If you do not elect any optional benefit, or if the only
optional benefit you elect is a death benefit, your
contract is not subject to investment requirements. Availability of Variable Portfolios. We may,
subject to any applicable law, make certain changes to
the Variable Portfolios offered in your contract. We may offer new Variable Portfolios or stop offering existing Variable Portfolios. New Variable Portfolios may be
made available to existing contract Owners, and Variable Portfolios
may be closed to new or subsequent Purchase Payments,
transfers or allocations. In addition, we may also
liquidate the shares of any Variable Portfolio, substitute the shares
of one Underlying Fund held by a Variable Portfolio for
another and/or merge Variable Portfolios or cooperate in
a merger of Underlying Funds. To the extent required by the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended, we may be required to obtain SEC approval or your
approval. |
Investment Options | ||
7
| |
RESTRICTIONS |
Location in
Prospectus | ||
| Are There Any
Restrictions on
Contract Benefits? |
Yes.
•There are restrictions and limitations relating to the benefits offered under the contract
(e.g., death benefits, Living Benefits, DCA Fixed Account, DCA
Program, Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program, Systematic
Withdrawal Program, Automatic Payment Plan).
•We reserve the right to modify or terminate the DCA Program, Automatic Asset
Rebalancing Program, Systematic Withdrawal Program, and Automatic
Payment Plan. •Withdrawals that exceed limits specified by the terms of a benefit may reduce the value of
the benefit by an amount greater than the value withdrawn and could
terminate the benefit. |
Optional Living
Benefits Death Benefits | ||
| |
TAXES |
| ||
| What are the
Contract’s Tax
Implications? |
•You should consult with a tax professional to determine the tax implications of an
investment in and payments received under the contract.
•If you purchase the contract through a tax-qualified plan or individual retirement account
(IRA), there is no additional tax benefit under the
contract. •Earnings under your contract are taxed at ordinary income tax rates when withdrawn.
You may have to pay a tax penalty if you take a withdrawal before age
59½. |
Taxes | ||
| |
CONFLICTS OF
INTEREST |
| ||
| How Are
Investment
Professionals
Compensated? |
Your financial representative may receive compensation for selling
this contract to you in the form of commissions,
additional cash compensation, and/or non-cash compensation. We may share the revenue we earn on this contract with your financial representative’s firm.
Revenue sharing arrangements and commissions may provide selling firms
and/or their registered representatives with an
incentive to favor sales of our contracts over other
variable annuity contracts (or other investments) with respect to
which a selling firm does not receive the same level of
additional compensation. You should ask your financial
representative about how they are compensated. |
Payments in Connection with Distribution of the Contract | ||
| Should I
Exchange My
Contract? |
Some financial representatives may have a financial incentive to offer
you a new contract in place of the one you already own.
You should exchange a contract you already own only if
you determine, after comparing the features, fees, and risks of both
contracts, that it is better for you to purchase the new
contract rather than continue to own your existing
contract. | |||
8
Fee Table
The following tables describe the fees and expenses that
you will pay when buying, owning, and surrendering or making withdrawals from an investment option or from the contract. Please refer to your
contract data page for information about the specific fees you will pay each year based on the options you have elected.
The first table describes the fees and expenses that you pay at the time you surrender the contract, make withdrawals from an investment option or from the contract, or make transfers
between investment options. State premium taxes may also be deducted.
Contract Owner Transaction
Expenses
| Maximum Withdrawal Charges
(as a percentage of each Purchase Payment)1 |
9% |
| Transfer Fee
(per transfer after the first 15 transfers in any
contract year) |
$25 |
The following tables describe the fees and expenses you will pay each year during the
time that you own the contract, not including Underlying Fund fees and expenses. If you chose to purchase an optional benefit, you will pay additional
charges, as shown below.
Contract Owner Annual Expenses
| Contract Maintenance Fee2 (addressed annually) |
$35 |
| Base Contract Expenses3 (deducted from the average daily ending net asset value allocated to the Variable Portfolios) |
1.40% |
Optional Death Benefits
| Maximum Anniversary Value Death Benefit Fee |
0.15% |
| Purchase Payment Accumulation Death Benefit
Fee |
0.15% |
| EstatePlus Fee4 |
0.25% |
Optional Living Benefits
You may have elected one of the following optional Living Benefits:
Optional MarketLock Fee
(calculated as a percentage of the MAV Benefit Base)5
| |
Annualized Fee |
| All years in which the feature is in effect |
0.65% |
Optional MarketLock For Two Fee
(calculated as a percentage of the MAV Benefit Base)5
| All years in which the feature is in effect |
Annualized Fee |
| Prior to Any Withdrawal |
0.40% |
| After the First Withdrawal |
0.80% |
Optional Seasons Income Rewards Fee
(calculated as a percentage of the Withdrawal Benefit Base)6
| Contract Year |
Annualized Fee |
| 0-7 |
0.65% |
| 8-10 |
0.45% |
| 11+ |
none |
Optional Seasons Promise Fee
(calculated as a percentage of contract value minus Purchase Payments received after the 90th day since the contract issue date)7
| Contract Year |
Annualized Fee |
| 0-7 |
0.50% |
| 8-10 |
0.25% |
| 11+ |
none |
Optional Income Protector Fee
| Optional Income Protector Fee
(calculated as a percentage of your Income
Benefit Base)8 |
0.10% |
Annual Underlying Fund Expenses
The following shows the minimum and maximum total operating expenses charged by the Underlying Funds
of the Trusts, before any waivers or reimbursements, that you may pay periodically
during the time that you own the contract. Expenses shown may change over time and may be higher or lower in the future. These amounts also include applicable fees and expenses if you choose to
invest in certain Underlying Funds. A complete list of Underlying Funds available under the contract, including their annual expenses, may be found in Appendix A.
| |
Minimum |
Maximum |
| Expenses deducted from
Underlying Fund assets,
including management fees,
distribution and/or service
(12b-1) fees, if applicable,
and other expenses. |
0.46%
|
1.76% |
9
Footnotes to the Fee Table:
1 Withdrawal Charge Schedule (as a percentage of each Purchase Payment withdrawn) declines over 7 or 9 years depending on whether you elected Seasons Rewards, as follows:
| Years Since Receipt: |
1 |
2 |
3 |
4 |
5 |
6 |
7 |
8 |
9 |
10+ |
| Without Seasons Rewards |
7% |
6% |
6% |
5% |
4% |
3% |
2% |
0% |
0% |
0% |
| With Seasons Rewards |
9% |
8% |
7% |
6% |
6% |
5% |
4% |
3% |
2% |
0% |
Your contract provides for a penalty-free withdrawal amount each year. Please see
PENALTY-FREE WITHDRAWAL AMOUNT below.
2 The contract maintenance fee is assessed annually and may be waived if contract value is
$50,000 or more. Please see STATE CONTRACT AVAILABILITY AND/OR VARIABILITY Appendix below.
3
If your Beneficiary elects to take the death benefit amount under the Extended Legacy Program, we will deduct an annual Base Contract Expense of 1.15%
which is deducted daily from the average daily ending net asset value allocated to the Variable Portfolios. Please see Extended Legacy Program under DEATH BENEFITS
below.
4 EstatePlus is an optional earnings enhancement death benefit. EstatePlus can only be elected if the optional Maximum Anniversary Value or Purchase Payment Accumulation death benefit is also elected. This feature is not available on contracts issued in Washington.
5 MarketLock and MarketLock For Two are optional guaranteed
minimum withdrawal benefits. The annual fee is calculated as a percentage of the MAV Benefit Base which determines the basis of the guaranteed benefit. The applicable
annualized fee is deducted from your contract value at the end of the first quarter following the election and quarterly thereafter. For a complete description of how
the MAV Benefit Base is calculated, please see OPTIONAL
LIVING BENEFITS below.
6 Seasons Income Rewards is an optional guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit. The annual fee is calculated as a percentage of the Withdrawal Benefit Base which determines the basis for the guaranteed benefit. The fee is deducted from your contract value at the end of the first quarter following election and quarterly thereafter. For a complete description of how the fee is calculated, please see OPTIONAL LIVING BENEFITS below.
7 Seasons Promise is an optional guaranteed minimum accumulation benefit. The annualized fee is deducted from your contract value at the end of the first quarter following election and quarterly thereafter. For contracts issued between February 10, 2003 and April 30, 2004, the fee is as follows: 0.45% for Years 0-7, 0.15% for Years 8-10, no fee for Years 11+. For contracts issued between September 30, 2002 and February 7, 2003, the fee is as follows: 0.35% for Years 0-7, 0.10% for Years 8-10, no fee for Years 11+. For a complete description of how the fee is calculated, please see OPTIONAL LIVING BENEFITS below.
8 Income Protector is an optional guaranteed minimum income
benefit. The fee is deducted annually from your contract value. For a complete description of
how the fee is calculated, please see OPTIONAL LIVING BENEFITS below.
10
Examples
These examples are intended to help you compare the cost of
investing in the Variable Portfolios with the cost of
investing in other annuity contracts that offer variable options. These costs include transaction
expenses, annual contract expenses, and annual Underlying Fund expenses.
These examples assume all contract value is allocated to Variable Portfolios. Your costs could differ from those shown below if you invest in the Fixed Account options.
The expense examples below assume that you invest
$100,000 in the Variable Portfolios for the time
periods indicated; your investment has a 5% return each year; and you incur the maximum or minimum fees and expenses of the Underlying Funds as indicated in the examples.
The Maximum Expense Examples
reflect the most expensive possible combination of charges (including additional charges for optional benefits). Although your actual costs may be
higher or lower, based on these assumptions, your costs at the end of the stated period would be the amounts set forth in the tables
below.
Maximum Expense Examples
(assuming annual contract expenses of 1.80%, (including election of Seasons Rewards, the optional
Maximum Anniversary Value death benefit and EstatePlus), the optional MarketLock For Two
feature (annual fee rate of 0.80%) and investment in an Underlying Fund with total
expenses of 1.76%*)
(1)
If you surrender your contract at the end of the applicable time period:
| 1 year |
3 years |
5 years |
10 years |
| $12,576 |
$19,479 |
$27,496 |
$44,550 |
(2)
If you annuitize your contract at the end of the applicable time
period:
| 1 year |
3 years |
5 years |
10 years |
| $3,576 |
$12,479 |
$21,496 |
$44,550 |
(3)
If you do not surrender your contract at the end of the
applicable time period:
| 1 year |
3 years |
5 years |
10 years |
| $3,576 |
$12,479 |
$21,496 |
$44,550 |
Minimum Expense Examples
(assuming minimum annual contract expenses of 1.40%, no election of optional features, and investment in an Underlying Fund with total expenses of
0.46%**)
(1)
If you surrender your contract at the end of the applicable time period:
| 1 year |
3 years |
5 years |
10 years |
| $8,859 |
$11,818 |
$14,030 |
$21,773 |
(2)
If you annuitize your contract at the end of the applicable time period:
| 1 year |
3 years |
5 years |
10 years |
| $1,859 |
$5,818 |
$10,030 |
$21,773 |
(3)
If you do not surrender your contract at the end of the applicable time period:
| 1 year |
3 years |
5 years |
10 years |
| $1,859 |
$5,818 |
$10,030 |
$21,773 |
Additional Expense Example Information
1.
In addition to the stated assumptions, the Expense Examples also assume that no transfer fees were imposed. Although premium taxes may apply in certain states,
they are not reflected in the Expense Examples.
2.
If you elected other optional features, your expenses would be lower than those shown in the Maximum Expense Examples. The Maximum Expense Examples assume that the
MAV Benefit Base, which is used to calculate the MarketLock for Two fee, equals contract
value and that no withdrawals are taken during the stated period.
In addition, depending on the state in which your contract was
issued, your expenses may be lower.
3.
Expense Examples with election of the Seasons Rewards program reflect the Seasons Rewards withdrawal charge schedule, but do not reflect any upfront Payment Enhancement.
4.
If you elected optional features, you do not pay fees for optional features once you begin the Income Phase (annuitize your contract); therefore, your expenses
will be lower than those shown here. Please see ANNUITY INCOME OPTIONS
below.
*
The 1 year Maximum Expense Examples reflect the SunAmerica Series Trust 0.81% fee
waiver.
**
The 1 year Minimum Expense Examples reflect the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust 0.03% fee waiver.
These examples should not be considered a representation of past or future expenses. Actual expenses may be
greater or less than those shown.
11
Principal Risks Of Investing In The Contract
Market Risk. Variable annuities involve risks, including possible loss of principal. An investment in the Variable Portfolios available under the contract is subject to the risk of negative investment performance.
You can lose money by investing in this contract, including loss of principal and/or
prior earnings. Your losses could be significant. This contract is not a deposit or obligation of, or guaranteed or endorsed by, any bank. This contract is
not federally insured by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, the Federal Reserve
Board, or any other agency.
Short-Term Investment Risk. This contract is not
designed for short-term investing and may not be appropriate for an investor who needs
ready access to cash. The benefits of tax deferral, long-term income, and Living
Benefit protections mean that this contract is more beneficial to
investors with a long investment time horizon.
Early Withdrawal Risk. This contract is not designed for short-term investing and may not be appropriate for an investor who needs ready access to
cash. You should carefully consider the risks associated with withdrawals under the contract. Withdrawals may be subject to significant withdrawal charges.If you make a withdrawal prior to age 59½, there may be adverse tax consequences, including a 10% IRS penalty tax. A
withdrawal may reduce the value of your standard and optional benefits. For instance, a
withdrawal will reduce the value of the death benefit. In addition, a withdrawal could reduce the value of an optional Living Benefit by an amount greater than the amount withdrawn and could result in termination of the benefit. A total withdrawal (surrender) will
result in the termination of your contract. We may defer payment of withdrawals from a Fixed Account option (including the Secure Value Account) for up to six months
when permitted by law. If you make a withdrawal within the first seven years, you may be assessed a Withdrawal Charge of up to 7% (or 9% within the first nine years for contracts with Seasons Rewards Feature), as a percentage of the payment amount withdrawn.
Variable Portfolio Risk. Amounts that you invest in the Variable Portfolios are subject to the risk of poor investment
performance. You assume the investment risk. You can gain or lose money if you invest
in these Variable Portfolios. Each Variable Portfolio’s performance depends on the
performance of its Underlying Fund. Each Underlying Fund has its own investment risks,
and you are exposed to the Underlying Fund’s investment risks when you invest in a
Variable Portfolio. You are responsible for allocating Purchase Payments to the
Variable Portfolios that are appropriate for you based on your own individual
circumstances, investment goals, financial situation, and risk tolerance. You bear the
risk of any decline in contract value resulting from the performance of the Variable Portfolio you have selected. In making your investment selections, you should investigate all information
available to you including
the Underlying Fund’s prospectus, statement of additional information and annual and
semi-annual reports. We do not provide investment advice, nor do we recommend or endorse
any particular Underlying Fund.
Availability of Variable Portfolios Risk. We may, subject to any applicable law, make certain changes to the Variable Portfolios offered in your contract. We
may offer new Variable Portfolios or stop offering existing Variable Portfolios.
Variable Portfolios may be closed to new or subsequent Purchase Payments, transfers, or allocations.
In addition, we may also liquidate shares of one Underlying Fund held by a Variable
Portfolio for another and/or merge Variable Portfolios or cooperate in a merger of Underlying Funds. New Variable Portfolios may have different performance characteristics. There is no guarantee that a
particular Variable Portfolio will always be available as an investment option under
the contract.
Selection Risk.
The optional benefits under the contract were designed for different financial goals
and to protect against different financial risks. There is a risk that you may not
choose, or may not have chosen, the benefit or benefits (if any) that are best suited for you based on your present or future needs and circumstances, and the benefits that are more suited for you (if any)
may no longer be available. In addition, if you elected an optional benefit and do not
use it, or if the contingencies upon which the benefit depend never occur, you will have paid for a benefit that you may not use or benefit from.
Purchase Payment Risk. Your ability to make subsequent Purchase Payments is subject to certain restrictions. We reserve the right to refuse any Purchase
Payment(s), limit the amount of subsequent Purchase Payment(s) with advance notice
based on age as shown below and election of optional benefit(s), and may require our prior approval before accepting Purchase Payments greater than the Purchase Payments Limit as defined in the Glossary. There is no guarantee that you will always be
permitted to make Purchase Payments.
Minimum Contract Value Risk. Where permitted by state law, we may terminate your contract if your contract value is less than $500 as a result of withdrawals and/or fees and charges. We will provide you with 60 days written notice that your contract is being terminated. At
the end of the notice period, we will distribute the contract’s remaining value
to you.
Financial Strength and
Claims-Paying Ability Risk. All guarantees under the contract that are paid from our
general account (including under any Fixed Account option) are subject to our financial strength and claims-paying ability.
Business Disruption. Our business is vulnerable to disruptions from natural and man-made disasters and catastrophes, such
as, but not limited to, hurricanes,
windstorms, flooding, earthquakes, wildfires, solar storms,
12
war or other
military action, acts of terrorism, explosions and fires, pandemics (such as COVID-19) and other highly contagious diseases, mass torts, failure of telecommunications or other critical infrastructure and other catastrophes. A natural or man-made
disaster or catastrophe may negatively affect the computer and other systems on which
we rely, including service outages or other unavailability, may interfere with our ability to receive, pickup and process mail, to calculate Accumulation Unit Values (“AUVs”), process other
contract-related transactions, or to otherwise provide our services, or may have other possible negative impacts. While we have developed and put in place what we believe to be
appropriate business continuity and disaster recovery plans and procedures to mitigate
operational risks and potential losses related to business disruptions resulting from natural and man-made disasters and catastrophes, there can be no assurance that we, our agents, the
Underlying Funds or our service providers will be able to successfully avoid negative
impacts resulting from such disasters and catastrophes.
Cybersecurity Risk. We rely heavily on interconnected computer systems and digital data to conduct our variable product business activities. Because our variable product business is highly dependent upon the
effective operation of our computer systems and those of our business partners and
service providers, our business is vulnerable to physical disruptions and utility outages, and susceptible to operational and information security risks resulting from information systems failure (e.g.,
hardware and software malfunctions), cyber-attacks, and user errors or
other disruptions that may compromise the confidentiality, integrity, or availability of such systems and data. These risks include, among other things, the theft, misuse, corruption, disclosure and destruction of
sensitive business data, including personal information, maintained on our or our
business partners’ or service providers’ systems, interference with our
websites (such as via denial of service attacks), other operational disruptions, and unauthorized
release of confidential customer information. Such systems failures, cyber-attacks, or other
disruptions affecting us, any third-party administrator, the Underlying Funds, intermediaries and other affiliated or third-party service providers, as well as our distribution
partners, may adversely affect us and your contract value. For instance, systems
failures and cyber-attacks may interfere with our processing of contract transactions, including the processing of orders from our website, our distribution partners, or with the Underlying Funds, impact our
ability to calculate AUVs, cause the release and possible destruction of confidential
customer or business information, including personal information, impede order processing, or subject us and/or
our service providers, distribution partners and other intermediaries to regulatory
fines and enforcement action, litigation risks and financial losses and/or cause reputational damage.
Cybersecurity risks may also impact the issuers of securities in which the Underlying Funds invest, which may cause the affected Underlying Funds to
lose value. There
may be an increased risk of cyber-attacks during periods of geo-political or military conflict.
Further, the widespread development, implementation, and use of AI, machine learning, data analytics and similar tools that collect, aggregate and analyze data or inputs
(collectively, “AI Tools”) may increase our exposure to, or exacerbate the risks of, cyber-attacks or other
security incidents, particularly where such technologies are exploited by third parties
to attempt to breach our or our business partners’ and service providers’ systems. Despite our implementation of policies and procedures, which we believe to be reasonable, that address physical, administrative and technical safeguards and controls and other
preventative actions to protect our systems and sensitive business and customer
information, including personal information, and reduce the risk of cyber-incidents, there can be no assurance that we or our distribution
partners, the Underlying Funds or our business partners and service providers will avoid cyber-attacks or information security breaches in the future that may affect your contract and/or
personal information.
Purchasing a Seasons SelectII
Variable Annuity
When you purchase a variable annuity, a contract exists between you and the Company. You are the
Owner of the contract.
Maximum Issue Age
We will not issue a contract to anyone age 86 or older on the contract issue date.
Note: In general, we will not issue a Qualified contract to anyone who is age 72 or older, unless it is shown that the minimum distribution required by the IRS is being made. Please see TAXES.
Joint Ownership
A Non-Qualified contract may be jointly owned by a spouse or non-spouse. Joint owners possess an equal and undivided interest in the contract. The age of the
older Owner is used to determine the availability of most age driven benefits.
The addition of a joint Owner after the contract has been issued is contingent upon prior review and
approval by the Company.
We will not issue a Qualified contract with joint owners, in accordance with tax law.
Spouse
Your spouse (as determined for federal tax law purposes) may jointly own the contract. In certain
states, domestic or civil union partners (“Domestic Partners”) qualify for
treatment as, or are equal to, spouses under state law.
Non-Spouse
Domestic Partners should consult with their tax adviser and/or financial representative as, they may not be able to
13
fully benefit from
certain benefits and features of the contract such as the optional Living Benefit, if
applicable, and Spousal Continuation of the death benefit.
Please see APPENDIX C — STATE CONTRACT AVAILABILITY AND/OR VARIABILITY for a list of states that require
that benefits and features be made to domestic or civil union partners.
Non-Natural Ownership
A trust, corporation or other non-natural entity may only own this contract if such entity has sufficiently demonstrated an Insurable Interest in the
Annuitant selected.
At its sole discretion, the Company reserves the right to decline to issue this contract to certain entities. We apply various considerations including but
not limited to:
•
Estate planning,
•
Tax consequences, and
•
The propriety of this contract as an investment consistent with a non-natural Owner’s organizational documentation.
For more information on non-natural ownership, please see TAXES. You should consult with your tax and/or legal advisor in connection with non-natural ownership of this contract.
Assignment of the Contract/Change of Ownership
You may assign this contract before beginning the Income Phase. We will not be bound by any assignment until we receive and process your written request at
our Annuity Service Center and you have received confirmation.
•
Your rights and those of any other person with rights under this contract will be subject to the
assignment.
•
We are not responsible for the validity, tax or other legal consequences of any assignment.
•
An assignment will not affect any payments we may make or actions we may take before we receive notice of the assignment.
We reserve the right not to recognize any assignment, as
determined in our sole discretion, if it changes the risk profile of the contract
owner, if no Insurable Interest exists, or if not permitted by the Internal Revenue Code.
Please see TAXES for details on the tax consequences of an
assignment. You should consult a qualified tax adviser before assigning the
contract.
Termination of the Contract for Misstatement and/or Fraud
The Company reserves the right to terminate the contract at any time if it discovers a misstatement
or fraudulent representation of any information provided in connection with the
issuance or ongoing administration of the contract.
If we learn of a
misstatement of age, we reserve the right to fully pursue our remedies including revocation of any age-driven benefits and/or termination of the contract. Please see APPENDIX C — STATE CONTRACT AVAILABILITY AND/OR VARIABILITY for specific
information.
Allocation of Purchase Payments
In order to issue your contract, we must receive your
initial Purchase Payment and all required paperwork in Good Order, including Purchase
Payment allocation instructions.
An initial Purchase Payment is the money you give us to purchase
a contract. Any additional money you give us to invest in the contract after purchase is a subsequent Purchase Payment.
Minimum Initial and Subsequent Purchase Payments
| |
Minimum
Initial
Purchase
Payment (1) |
Minimum
Subsequent
Purchase
Payment |
Minimum
Automatic
Subsequent
Purchase
Payment |
| Qualified(2) |
$2,000
|
$500
|
$100
|
| Non-Qualified(2) |
$5,000
|
$500
|
$100 |
(1)
If you purchased your contract through certain broker-dealers, the minimum initial Purchase Payment may be higher than the amounts shown in this table.
(2)
These amounts depend upon whether a contract is Qualified or Non-Qualified for tax purposes. For further explanation, please see TAXES.
Purchase
Payment Restrictions
We reserve the right to refuse any Purchase Payment. We will not accept subsequent Purchase Payments
from contract Owners age 86 or older.
We will not accept subsequent Purchase Payments on or
after the first contract anniversary if you have elected an optional Living Benefit feature. If you send a subsequent
Purchase Payment after the first contract anniversary, the Purchase Payment will not be considered to be received by us and we will return the Purchase
Payment. As a result, the Income Base of the Living Benefit may not be increased by adding Purchase Payments. We reserve the right to require Company approval prior to accepting Purchase Payments greater than the Purchase Payments Limit as
defined in the Glossary.
•
For contracts owned by a non-natural Owner, we reserve the right to require prior Company approval to accept any Purchase Payment.
•
Purchase Payments that would cause total Purchase Payments in all contracts issued by AGL,
The United States Life Insurance Company ("US Life") and/or The Variable Annuity Life Insurance Company ("VALIC") to the same Owner and/or Annuitant to exceed the Purchase Payments Limit may also be subject to Company
pre-approval.
14
Submission
of Purchase Payments
Purchase Payments will be priced when received at the Annuity Service Center. Delivery of Purchase Payments to any other address may result in a delay in crediting your contract until the Purchase Payment is received at the Annuity Service Center.
Regular Mail:
Purchase Payments sent by regular mail must be sent to the Premium Processing Center at the following
address:
| American General Life Insurance Company Premium Processing Center P.O. Box 100330 Pasadena, CA 91189-0330 |
Express Delivery:
Purchase Payments sent by overnight or express delivery must be sent to the Premium Processing Center at the following address:
| American General Life Insurance Company JPM Chase-AGL 100330 Premium Processing Center
2710 Media Center Drive
Building #6, Suite 120
Los Angeles, CA 90065-1750 |
Receipt of Purchase Payments:
Purchase Payments will be picked up at the mailing addresses noted above and forwarded to our
Annuity Service Center. Purchase Payments, however, are not considered received by us
until received at our Annuity Service Center in Good Order.
We allocate your Purchase Payment to your contract as of
the date such Purchase Payment is priced. Initial Purchase Payments received at the
Annuity Service Center in Good Order before Market Close will be priced within two NYSE
business days after it is received. Initial Purchase Payments received at the Annuity
Service Center in Good Order after Market Close will be priced within two NYSE business days after the next NYSE business day.
If we do not have complete information necessary to issue your contract, we will contact you. If we do not receive the necessary information within five NYSE
business days, we will obtain your permission to keep your money until we get the
information necessary to issue the contract, or we will send your money back to whomever we received the funds.
Any subsequent Purchase Payment will be priced as of the day it is received by the Annuity Service
Center in Good Order before Market Close. If the subsequent Purchase Payment is
received at the Annuity Service Center in Good Order after Market Close, it will be priced as of the next NYSE business day.
We invest your
subsequent Purchase Payments in the Variable Portfolios and available Fixed Accounts according to any allocation instructions that accompany the subsequent Purchase Payment. If we receive a
Purchase Payment without allocation instructions, we will invest the Purchase Payment
according to your allocation instructions on file.
Electronic Transmission:
We will accept initial and subsequent Purchase Payments by
electronic transmission from certain broker-dealer firms.
Agent of Company:
We may have an agreement in place whereby your broker-dealer may be deemed our agent for receipt of
your Purchase Payments. If a broker-dealer is deemed to be our agent, Purchase
Payments will be priced as of the time they are received by the broker-dealer.
You assume any risk in market fluctuations if you submit your Purchase Payment directly to a broker-dealer that does not have such an agreement, should there be a delay in that broker-dealer delivering your Purchase Payment to us. Please check with your financial representative to determine if his/her broker-dealer has an agreement with the Company that deems the broker-dealer an agent of the Company.
Automatic Payment Plan:
Once you have contributed at least the minimum initial Purchase Payment, you can establish an Automatic Payment Plan that allows you to make subsequent Purchase Payments , if you have not elected a Living Benefit feature.
Seasons Rewards Program
If you were age 80 or younger at the time your contract was issued you may have elected to participate in this program at contract issue. We contribute an
upfront Payment Enhancement and, if available, a deferred Payment Enhancement to your
contract in conjunction with each Purchase Payment you invest during the life of your
contract. If you elected to participate in this program, all Purchase Payments are
subject to a nine year withdrawal charge schedule. Please see EXPENSES
below. These withdrawal charges may offset the value of any Payment Enhancement, if you make an early withdrawal. Amounts we contribute to your contract under this
program are considered earnings and are allocated to your contract as described below.
There may be scenarios in which due to negative market conditions and your inability to remain invested over the long-term, a contract with the Seasons Rewards program may not perform as well as the contract without the program.
Purchase Payments may not be invested in dollar cost averaging Fixed Accounts if you participate in the Seasons Rewards program. However, you may use other Fixed Account options, if available, for dollar cost averaging. Please see DOLLAR COST
AVERAGING PROGRAM below.
15
Seasons
Rewards Enhancement Levels
Each enhancement level is a range of dollar amounts, which may correspond to different enhancement rates and dates. The enhancement level applicable to your
initial Purchase Payment is determined by the amount of that initial Purchase Payment.
With respect to any subsequent Purchase Payments we determine your enhancement level by adding your contract value on the date we receive each subsequent Purchase Payment to the amount of the
subsequent Purchase Payment. Enhancement levels may change from time to time, at our
sole discretion.
Upfront Payment
Enhancement
An upfront Payment Enhancement is an amount we add to your contract on the day we receive a Purchase
Payment. We calculate an upfront Payment Enhancement amount as a percentage of each
Purchase Payment. We refer to this percentage amount as the upfront Payment Enhancement
Rate. We periodically review and establish the upfront Payment Enhancement Rate, which
may increase or decrease at any time, but will never be less than 2%. The applicable
upfront Payment Enhancement Rate is the rate in effect for the applicable enhancement level at the time we receive each Purchase Payment under your contract. The upfront Payment Enhancement amounts are
allocated among Variable Portfolios and available Fixed Accounts according to the
current allocation instructions on file when we receive each Purchase Payment.
Deferred Payment Enhancement
A deferred Payment Enhancement is an amount we may add to your contract on a stated future date (the
“deferred Payment Enhancement date”). We calculate a deferred Payment
Enhancement amount, if applicable, as a percentage of each Purchase Payments received at the time we receive the Purchase Payment. We refer to this percentage amount as the deferred Payment
Enhancement Rate. We periodically review and establish the deferred Payment Enhancement
Rates and deferred Payment Enhancement dates. The deferred Payment Enhancement Rate
being offered may increase, decrease or be eliminated by us at any time. The deferred Payment Enhancement date, if applicable, may change at any time. The applicable deferred Payment Enhancement date and
deferred Payment Enhancement Rate are those which may be in effect for the applicable
enhancement level at the time when we receive each Purchase Payment. Any applicable deferred Payment Enhancement, when credited, is allocated to a money market or similar portfolio.
If you withdraw any portion of a Purchase Payment, to which a deferred Payment Enhancement applies,
prior to the deferred Payment Enhancement date, we reduce the amount of the
corresponding deferred Payment Enhancement in the same proportion that your withdrawal (and any fees and charges associated with such withdrawals) reduces that Purchase Payment. For purposes of determining
the deferred
Payment Enhancement, withdrawals are assumed to be taken from earnings first, then from Purchase
Payments, on a first-in-first-out basis.
We will not allocate any applicable deferred Payment Enhancement, if any, to your contract if the following circumstances occur prior to the deferred
Payment Enhancement date:
•
You surrender your contract;
•
A death benefit is paid on your contract;
•
You switch to the Income Phase of your contract; or
•
You fully withdraw the corresponding Purchase Payment.
90 Day Window
As of the 90th day after your contract was issued, we will total your Purchase Payments made over those 90 days, without considering any investment gain or
loss in contract value on those Purchase Payments. If your total Purchase Payments
bring you to an enhancement level which, as of the date we issued your contract, would have provided for a higher upfront and/or deferred Payment Enhancement rate on each Purchase Payment, you will get the
benefit of the enhancement rate(s) that were applicable to that higher enhancement
level at the time your contract was issued (“Look Back Adjustment”). We will add any applicable upfront Look Back Adjustment to your contract on the 90th day following the date of contract issue.
We will send you a confirmation indicating any applicable upfront and/or deferred Look
Back Adjustment, on or about the 90th day following the date of contract issuance. We will allocate any applicable upfront Look Back Adjustment according to your then current allocation instructions on
file for subsequent Purchase Payments at the time we make the contribution and if
applicable, to a money market or similar portfolio, for a deferred Look Back Adjustment.
Current Enhancement Levels
The Enhancement Levels, Upfront Payment Enhancement Rate, Deferred Payment Enhancement Rate and
Deferred Payment Enhancement date applicable to all Purchase Payments as of the date of
this prospectus are:
| Enhancement Level |
Upfront Payment
Enhancement Rate |
Deferred Payment
Enhancement Rate |
| Under $500,000 |
4% |
0% |
| $500,000 – more |
5% |
0% |
We are currently not offering a Deferred Payment Enhancement Rate.
We reserve the right to modify, suspend or terminate the Seasons Rewards program at any time for existing contracts and for subsequent Purchase Payments.
16
Accumulation Units
We credit your contract with Accumulation Units when you allocate a Purchase Payment to the Variable Portfolios. We determine the value of each Accumulation
Unit at the close of every NYSE business day. The value of an Accumulation Unit goes up
and down based on the performance of the Variable Portfolios and the fees and expenses under your contract.
The number of Accumulation Units you are credited is calculated the day we process your Purchase Payment. Please see ALLOCATION OF
PURCHASE PAYMENTS.
The Accumulation Unit value is determined by multiplying the Accumulation Unit value for the
preceding NYSE business day by a factor for the current NYSE business day.
The factor is determined by:
1.
dividing the net asset value per share of the Underlying Fund at the end of the current NYSE business day, plus any dividend or capital gains per
share declared on behalf of the Underlying Fund as of that day, by the net asset value
per share of the Underlying Fund for the previous NYSE business day; and
2.
multiplying it by one minus all applicable daily asset based charges.
We determine the number of Accumulation Units credited to your
contract by adding the Purchase Payment and Payment Enhancement, if applicable, and dividing that amount, by the Accumulation Unit value for the specific Variable Portfolio.
Example (Contracts Without Seasons Rewards):
We receive a $25,000 Purchase Payment from you on Wednesday. You allocate the money to Variable
Portfolio A. We determine that the value of an Accumulation Unit for Variable Portfolio
A is $11.10 at Market Close on Wednesday. We then divide $25,000 by $11.10 and credit
your contract on Wednesday night with 2,252.2523 Accumulation Units for Variable
Portfolio A.
Example (Contracts With Seasons Rewards):
We receive a $25,000 Purchase Payment from you on Wednesday. You allocate the money to Variable Portfolio A. If the Payment Enhancement is 2% of your
Purchase Payment, we would add a Payment Enhancement of $500 to your contract. We
determine that the value of an Accumulation Unit for Variable Portfolio A is $11.10 at
Market Close on Wednesday. We then divide $25,500 by $11.10 and credit your contract on
Wednesday with 2,297.2973 Accumulation Units for Variable Portfolio
A.
Performance of the Variable Portfolios and the insurance charges under your contract affect Accumulation Unit values. These factors cause the value of your
contract to go up and down.
Free Look
You may cancel your contract within ten days after receiving it. Your state may require a longer free look period. We call this a “free
look.” Please check your contract or with your financial representative. To cancel, you must mail the contract along with your written free look request to our Annuity Service Center at P.O.
Box 15570, Amarillo, Texas 79105-5570.
If you decide to cancel your contract during the free look period, generally we will refund to you the value of your contract on the day we receive your
request in Good Order at the Annuity Service Center minus the Free Look Payment
Enhancement Deduction, if applicable. If you elect the Seasons Rewards feature, the Free Look Payment Enhancement Deduction is equal to the lesser of (1) the value of any Payment Enhancement(s) on the day we receive your free look request; or (2) the Payment
Enhancement amount(s), if any, which we allocated to your contract. Thus, you receive
any gain and we bear any loss on any Payment Enhancement(s) if you decide to cancel
your contract during the free look period. Certain states require us to return your
Purchase Payments upon a free look request. Additionally, all contracts issued as an IRA
require the full return of Purchase Payments upon a free look.
If your contract was issued either in a state requiring return of Purchase Payments or as an IRA,
and you cancel your contract during the free look period, we return the greater of (1)
your Purchase Payments; or (2) the value of your contract on the day we receive your request in Good Order at the Annuity Service Center. With respect to these contracts, we reserve the right to put your
money and the Payment Enhancement, if you elected the Seasons Rewards feature, in a money market or similar portfolio during the free look period and will allocate your money and the Payment Enhancement according to your
instructions at the end of the applicable free look period.
Exchange Offers
From time to time, we allow you to exchange an older variable annuity issued by the Company or one
of its affiliates, for a newer product with different features and benefits issued by
the Company or one of its affiliates. Such an exchange offer will be made in accordance with applicable federal securities laws and state insurance rules and regulations. We will provide the
specific terms and conditions of any such exchange offer at the time the offer is
made.
17
Investment Options
You may allocate purchase payments using one or a combination of the investment options and Fixed Accounts, as may be available under your
contract:
•
Variable Portfolios
•
Fixed Accounts
•
Dollar Cost Averaging Fixed Account
Variable Portfolios
The Variable Portfolios available under the contract invest in
the Underlying Funds of the Trusts. Contract value allocated to a Variable Portfolio will vary based on the investment experience of the corresponding Underlying
Fund in which the Variable Portfolio invests. There is a risk of loss of the entire amount invested.
Information regarding each Underlying Fund, including (i) its
name, (ii) its type, (iii) its investment advisor and any sub-investment advisor, (iv) current expenses, and (v) performance is available in an appendix to this
prospectus. See APPENDIX A - INVESTMENT OPTIONS AVAILABLE UNDER THE CONTRACT.
Each Underlying Fund has issued a prospectus that contains more
detailed information about the Underlying Fund. Read these prospectuses carefully before investing. Paper or electronic copies of the Underlying
Fund prospectuses may be obtained by calling (855) 421-2692 or visiting our website at www.corebridgefinancial.com/ProductProspectuses.
You may also obtain information about the Underlying Funds by
accessing the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission’s website at www.sec.gov.
The Variable Portfolios offered through this contract are selected by us and we may consider various
factors in the selection process, including but not limited to: asset class coverage,
the strength of the investment advisor’s or subadvisor’s reputation and tenure, brand recognition, performance and the capability and qualification of each investment firm. Another factor we may
consider is whether the Underlying Fund or its service providers (i.e., the investment
advisor and/or subadvisor(s)) or their affiliates will make payments to us or our affiliates in connection with certain administrative, marketing and support services, or whether the Underlying Fund’s
service providers have affiliates that can provide marketing and distribution support
for sales of the contract. Please see PAYMENTS IN
CONNECTION WITH DISTRIBUTION OF THE CONTRACT
below.
We review the Variable Portfolios periodically and may make changes if we determine that a Variable
Portfolio no longer satisfies one or more of the selection criteria and/or if the
Variable Portfolio has not attracted significant allocations from contract Owners.
From time to time, certain Variable Portfolio names are changed. When we are notified of a name change, we will make changes so that the new name is
properly shown. However, until we complete the changes, we may provide you with various
forms, reports and confirmations that reflect a Variable Portfolio’s prior name.
You are responsible for allocating Purchase Payments to the Variable Portfolios as is appropriate
for your own individual circumstances, investment goals, financial situation and risk
tolerance. You should periodically review your allocations and values to ensure they
continue to suit your needs. You bear the risk of any decline in contract value resulting from the performance of the Variable Portfolios you have selected. In making your investment selections,
you should investigate all information available to you including the Underlying
Fund’s prospectus, statement of additional information and annual and semi-annual reports.
The Trusts serve as the underlying investment vehicles for other variable annuity contracts issued
by the Company and other affiliated and unaffiliated insurance companies. Neither the
Company nor the Trusts believe that offering shares of the Trusts in this manner disadvantages you. The Trusts are monitored for potential conflicts. The Trusts may have other Underlying Funds, in addition to those
listed here, that are not available for investment under this contract.
We do not provide investment advice, nor do we recommend or endorse any particular Variable
Portfolio. The Variable Portfolios along with their respective advisors are listed
below.
•
Fidelity® Variable Insurance Products – Service Class 2 Shares
•
Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust – Class Service Shares
•
T. Rowe Price Equity Series, Inc. – Class 2 Shares
•
Seasons Series Trust – Class 3 Shares (for contracts purchased on or after November 18, 2003)
•
Seasons Series Trust – Class 1 and Class 2 Shares (for contracts purchased prior to November 18, 2003)
•
SunAmerica Series Trust – Class 3 Shares (for contracts purchased or after November 18, 2003)
•
SunAmerica Series Trust – Class 2 Shares (for contracts purchased prior to November 18, 2003)
Premier Portfolios
The Premier Portfolios reflect the investment expertise of one or more investment managers and offer
a broad range of investment categories.
18
Select Portfolios
The Select Portfolios each have a distinct investment objective, utilizing a disciplined investing style to achieve its objective. Each Select Portfolio,
with the exception of the SA JPMorgan Ultra-Short Bond Portfolio, invests in an
Underlying Fund of the Seasons Series Trust. Except for the SA JPMorgan Ultra-Short
Bond Portfolio and the SA American Century Inflation Managed Portfolio, each Select
Portfolio is managed by multiple managers. One component of each Select Portfolio, with
the exception of the SA American Century Inflation Managed Portfolio, invests in a
passively managed component that tracks a particular target index or subset of an
index. The passively managed component of each Select Portfolio is intended to balance
some of the risks associated with an actively traded portfolio. Please see the Seasons
Series Trust prospectus for additional information regarding the management of the
Select Portfolios.
Focused Portfolios
Each Focused Portfolio offers you a manager who advises a separate portion of the Focused Portfolio.
The manager actively selects a limited number of stocks that represent its best stock
selection. This approach to investing results in a more concentrated portfolio, which will be less diversified than other Variable Portfolios, and may be subject to greater market risks.
Managed Allocation Portfolios
Each Managed Allocation Portfolio has a different
investment goal and is structured as a Fund-of-Funds, investing its assets in a
combination of the Select Portfolios and the Focused Portfolios. A Fund-of-Funds generally offers investors an efficient means of diversification among a number of mutual funds while
obtaining professional management in determining which funds to select, how much of
their assets to commit to each fund, and when to make that
selection.
Each Managed Allocation Portfolio is managed by SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC
(“SAAMCo”). SAAMCo creates a target allocation annually for each Managed
Allocation Portfolio. The target allocation will reflect the percentage in which a Managed Allocation Portfolio should invest in its Underlying Funds. Due to market movements, portfolio management
decisions or cash flow considerations, SAAMCo may determine that a Managed Allocation
Portfolio’s investments in its Underlying Funds require adjustments in order to meet its target allocation. Generally, SAAMCo will manage the investments among the Underlying Funds for each
Managed Allocation Portfolio to match its target allocation and to rebalance assets
back to the target allocation, as it deems necessary.
This approach allows the Managed Allocation Portfolios to offer
professional asset management on two levels: 1) the
fund management of each underlying Select and Focused Portfolio; and 2) the overlay portfolio
management provided by SAAMCo.
The four Managed Allocation Portfolios’ objectives and investment strategies are:
| Managed
Allocation
Portfolios |
Objective |
Investment Strategy |
| SA
Allocation
Aggressive |
Long-term capital
appreciation |
Invests primarily in
equity-based portfolios.
Designed to provide higher
growth potential, while
maintaining risk at a
reasonable level. |
| SA
Allocation
Moderately
Aggressive |
Long-term capital
appreciation |
Focuses on equity investing to
help maximize growth
potential, but also invests a
portion of its assets in the
bond market for income. |
| SA
Allocation
Moderate |
Long-term capital
appreciation and
moderate current
income |
Combines equity investing with
increased exposure to fixed
income investing. Designed for
investors who want growth,
but who are also seeking a
moderate level of income. |
| SA
Allocation
Balanced |
Long-term capital
appreciation and
income |
Offers the greatest exposure to fixed income. Designed for investors who need greater balance of growth potential and current income. |
If you invest in a Managed Allocation Portfolio, you pay the expenses of the Managed Allocation
Portfolio and indirectly pay a proportionate share of the expenses of the Underlying
Funds in which the Managed Allocation Portfolio invests. As a result, you will pay
higher fees and expenses under the Fund-of-Funds structure than if you invested directly in each of the Underlying Funds held in the Fund-of-Funds structure.
Seasons Strategies
Each Seasons Strategy has a different investment objective and is a Variable Portfolio of the
Separate Account that invests in three Underlying Funds of Seasons Series Trust. The
allocation of money among these Underlying Funds varies depending on the objective of the Seasons Strategy. The Seasons Strategies are designed utilizing an asset allocation approach to meet your investment
needs over time, considering factors such as your age, goals and risk tolerance.
However, each Seasons Strategy is designed to achieve different levels of growth over time.
The three Underlying Funds in which a Seasons Strategy can invest are detailed in the pie charts in
APPENDIX A - INVESTMENT OPTIONS AVAILABLE UNDER THE CONTRACT. The Underlying Funds comprising the Seasons Strategies may only be purchased by the Seasons
Strategies.
19
The Seasons
Strategies use an investment approach based on asset allocation. This approach is achieved by each Seasons Strategy investing in distinct percentages in three specific Underlying Funds. In turn, the
Underlying Funds invest in a combination of domestic and international stocks, bonds
and cash. The goal for each Seasons Strategy is to have a specified asset mix of stocks, bonds and cash in accordance with the specified objective of the Seasons Strategy and relative to the Underlying Funds
in which the Seasons Strategy invests. The stated target asset allocation percentages
and the mix of Underlying Funds comprising each Seasons Strategy do not change for the life of the contract. Please see the Seasons Series Trust prospectus which describes in detail the Underlying
Funds that comprise each Seasons Strategy.
Seasons Strategy Rebalancing
Each quarter a rebalancing occurs among the Underlying Funds of the Season Strategies to realign each Seasons Strategy with its distinct percentage
investment detailed below. This rebalancing is designed to help maintain the asset
allocation mix for each Seasons Strategy. The pie charts on the following page demonstrate the asset allocation mix for each Seasons Strategy and the percentage allocation of each Underlying Fund in
which the Seasons Strategy invests.
Before the end of each quarter (or as close to such date as is administratively practicable), your money will be allocated among the various Underlying Funds
according to the percentages set forth on the next page. Additionally, within each
Multi-Managed Portfolio, as identified below, your investment will be rebalanced among the various components. Rebalancing a Seasons Strategy may involve shifting a portion of assets out of
Underlying Funds with higher returns into Underlying Funds with relatively lower
returns.
Please see APPENDIX A - INVESTMENT OPTIONS AVAILABLE UNDER THE CONTRACT for the Seasons Strategies available for investment.
Substitution, Addition or
Deletion of Variable Portfolios
We may, subject to any applicable law, make certain changes to the Variable Portfolios offered in
your contract. We may offer new Variable Portfolios or stop offering existing Variable
Portfolios. New Variable Portfolios may be made available to existing contract Owners, and Variable Portfolios may be closed to new or subsequent Purchase Payments, transfers or allocations. In
addition, we may also liquidate the shares of any Variable Portfolio, substitute the
shares of one Underlying Fund held by a Variable Portfolio for another and/or merge
Variable Portfolios or cooperate in a merger of Underlying Funds. To the extent required by the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended, we may be required to obtain SEC approval or your
approval.
Fixed Accounts
Fixed Accounts credit a fixed rate of interest that compounds daily for a specific period of time to an annual interest rate that we declare for that
for that period of time. More information regarding the features of the Fixed Accounts
including (i) its name, (ii) its term, and (iii) its minimum guaranteed interest rates, is available in an appendix to this prospectus. See APPENDIX A - INVESTMENT OPTIONS AVAILABLE UNDER THE CONTRACT.
Your contract may offer a Fixed Account for a guaranteed period. Your Fixed Account interest
crediting rates are guaranteed for amounts allocated to each Fixed Account for up to 1
year. Thereafter, for Fixed Accounts other than Dollar Cost Averaging Fixed Account options (as described below), we will declare annual Fixed Account crediting rates each contract year, and this rate will
never be lower than 1%. Factors that influence the declared Fixed Account renewal rate include, but are not limited to, the level of US treasury rates, credit spreads on
corporate bonds and other fixed income instruments, company asset-liability matching
strategies, the length of the contract withdrawal charge period and the number of years
since your annuity contract was issued. You may obtain current interest rates by calling
the Annuity Service Center or by speaking with your financial representative.
Please check with your financial representative regarding the availability of a Fixed Account. Allocations to the Fixed Account are obligations of the General
Account. In reliance on certain exemptions and exclusions, interests in the General Account are not registered as
securities under the Securities Act of 1933 and not registered as an investment company
under the Investment Company Act of 1940. However, the disclosures in the prospectus about the Fixed Accounts are subject to certain provisions of the federal securities laws regarding the accuracy and
completeness of disclosures. Please see GENERAL ACCOUNT below.
Minimum Guaranteed Interest Rate
We guarantee that the interest rate credited to amounts allocated to any Fixed Account guarantee periods will never be less than the guaranteed minimum
interest rate specified in your contract. Once the rate is established, it will not
change for the duration of the guarantee period. The minimum guaranteed interest rate
can vary but is never lower than 1%. We determine which, if any, guarantee periods will
be offered at any time in our sole discretion, unless state law requires us to do otherwise.
Interest Rate Categories
There are three categories of interest rates for money allocated to the Fixed Accounts. The
applicable rate is guaranteed until the corresponding guarantee period expires.
20
With each category
of interest rate, your money may be credited a different rate as follows:
•
Initial Rate: The rate credited to any portion of the initial Purchase Payment allocated to a Fixed Account.
•
Current Rate: The rate credited to any portion of a subsequent Purchase Payment allocated to a Fixed Account.
•
Renewal Rate: The rate credited to money transferred from a Fixed Account or a Variable Portfolio into a Fixed Account and to money remaining in a Fixed Account after expiration of a guarantee period.
Fixed Account Restrictions
At any time we are crediting the minimum guaranteed interest rate specified in your contract, we reserve the right to restrict your ability to invest
into the Fixed Accounts. All Fixed Accounts may not be available in your state. Please
check with your financial representative regarding the availability of Fixed Accounts.
Dollar Cost Averaging Fixed Accounts
Purchase Payments
You may invest initial and/or subsequent Purchase Payments in the dollar cost averaging (“DCA”) Fixed Accounts, if available. The minimum
Purchase Payment amounts are as follows:
| DCA Fixed Account |
Minimum Purchase Payment |
| 6-Month |
$600 |
| 12-Month |
$1,200 |
| 2-Year |
$2,400 |
•
The DCA Fixed Accounts only accept initial and subsequent Purchase Payments because they are offered as “source” accounts exclusively
to facilitate the DCA Program for a specified time period.
•
You may not make a transfer from a Variable Portfolio or available Fixed Account into a DCA Fixed Account. Please see DOLLAR COST AVERAGING PROGRAM below for more information.
•
Unless otherwise directed by you, any Purchase Payment less than the above minimum amounts will automatically be allocated to available investment
options according to your current allocation instructions on file.
Purchase Payments
may not be invested in DCA Fixed Accounts if you elect the Seasons Rewards program.
DCA Interest Rate Crediting
DCA Fixed Accounts credit a fixed rate of interest and can only be elected to facilitate a DCA
Program. Interest is credited to amounts allocated to the DCA Fixed Accounts
while your money is
transferred to available investment options over certain specified time frames. The interest rates applicable to the DCA Fixed Accounts may differ from those applicable to any other Fixed Account but
will never be less than the minimum guaranteed interest rate specified in your
contract. The minimum guaranteed interest rate can vary but is never lower than 1%.
However, when using a DCA Fixed Account, the annual interest rate is paid on a
declining balance as you systematically transfer your money to available investment
options. Therefore, the actual effective yield will be less than the stated annual crediting rate. We reserve the right to change the availability of DCA Fixed Accounts offered, unless state
law requires us to do otherwise.
Transfers/Withdrawals from Fixed Accounts
There are no restrictions with respect to transferring out of or taking a withdrawal from a Fixed
Account. If you make a transfer out of or a withdrawal from a Fixed Account prior to
the end of a guarantee period, you will be credited the interest earned up to the time of transfer or withdrawal. When a guarantee period ends, you may leave your money in the same Fixed Account or you may
reallocate your money to another Fixed Account, if available, or to the Variable
Portfolios. If you do not want to leave your money in the same Fixed Account, you must contact us within 30 days after the end of the guarantee period and provide us with new allocation instructions.
We do not contact you. If you do not contact us, your
money will remain in the same Fixed Account where it will earn interest at the renewal rate then in effect for that Fixed Account.
We reserve the right to defer payments for a withdrawal
from a Fixed Account for up to six months.
If available through our Dollar Cost Averaging Program, you may systematically transfer interest earned in available Fixed Accounts into any of the Variable Portfolios on a monthly basis. Systematic transfers may be
started, changed or terminated at any time by contacting our Annuity Service
Center.
Check with your financial representative about the current availability of this service.
Dollar Cost Averaging Program
Under the DCA Program, you systematically
transfer a specified dollar amount or percentage of contract value from a Variable
Portfolio, available Fixed Account or DCA Fixed Account (“source account”) to any available investment options (“target account”).
The DCA Program allows you to invest gradually in available investment options at no additional cost. The DCA Program is designed to lessen the impact
of market fluctuations on your investment. However, the DCA Program can neither
guarantee a profit nor protect your investment against a loss. When you elect the DCA
Program, you are continuously investing in securities
21
fluctuating at
different price levels. You should consider your tolerance for investing through periods of fluctuating price levels.
Example of DCA Program
Assume that you want to move $750 each month from one Variable Portfolio to another Variable
Portfolio over six months. You set up a DCA Program and purchase Accumulation Units at
the following values:
| Month |
Accumulation Unit Value |
Units Purchased |
|
1 |
$7.50 |
100 |
|
2 |
$5.00 |
150 |
|
3 |
$10.00 |
75 |
|
4 |
$7.50 |
100 |
|
5 |
$5.00 |
150 |
| 6 |
$7.50 |
100 |
You paid an average price of only $6.67 per Accumulation Unit over six months, while the average market price actually was $7.08. By investing an equal
amount of money each month, you automatically buy more Accumulation Units when the
market price is low and fewer Accumulation Units when the market price is high. This example is for illustrative purposes only.
DCA Program Guidelines
•
Fixed Accounts are not available as target accounts for the DCA Program.
•
Transfers occur on a monthly periodic schedule.
•
The minimum transfer amount under the DCA Program is $100 per transaction, regardless of the source account.
•
Transfers resulting from your participation in the DCA Program are not counted towards the number
of free transfers per contract year.
Allocation of Subsequent Purchase Payments to DCA Program
If you have not elected an optional Living Benefit and you choose to allocate subsequent Purchase Payments to an active DCA Program with an available Fixed Account serving as the source account, the rate applicable to that Fixed Account at the time we receive the
subsequent Purchase Payment will apply. Further, we will begin transferring subsequent
Purchase Payments into your target account allocations on the same day of the month as the initial active DCA Program. Therefore, you may not receive a full 30 days of interest prior to the
first transfer to the target account(s). Please see DOLLAR COST
AVERAGING FIXED ACCOUNTS above for more
information.
Termination of DCA Program
You may terminate the DCA Program at any time. If you terminate the DCA Program and money remains in the DCA
Fixed Account(s), we transfer the remaining money according to your current allocation instructions on file.
Upon notification of your death, we will terminate the DCA Program and transfer the remaining money according to the current allocation instructions on
file.
Automatic Asset
Rebalancing Program
Market fluctuations may cause the percentage of your investment in the Variable Portfolios to differ
from your original allocations. Automatic Asset Rebalancing typically involves shifting
portions of your money into and out of investment options so that the resulting allocations are consistent with your current investment instructions.
Under the Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program:
•
You may elect to have your investments in the Variable Portfolios and/or Fixed Accounts, if available, periodically rebalanced to return your
allocations to preselected percentages for no additional charge.
•
At your request, rebalancing occurs on a quarterly, semiannual or annual basis.
•
Transfers resulting from your participation in this program are not counted against the number of
free transfers per contract year.
Changes to
Rebalancing Instructions
If you make a transfer, you must provide updated rebalancing
instructions. If you do not provide new rebalancing instructions at the time you make such transfer, we will change your ongoing rebalancing instructions to reflect the percentage allocations among the
new Variable Portfolios and/or Fixed Accounts, if available, resulting from your
transfer which will replace any previous rebalancing instructions you may have provided (“Default Rebalancing Instructions”). You may change any applicable Default Rebalancing Instructions at
any time by contacting the Annuity Service Center. If we cannot complete automatic
rebalancing according to your current instructions due to Variable Portfolio changes, we reserve the right to allocate the applicable amounts that would have been transferred to the impacted Variable
Portfolio(s) to a money market option available under the contract.
Upon notification of your death, we will terminate the
Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program.
Transfers During the Accumulation Phase
Subject to the Company’s rules, restrictions and
policies (including short term trading policies) described below, you may transfer
funds between the Variable Portfolios and/or any available Fixed Accounts.
•
Funds already in your contract cannot be transferred into the DCA Fixed Accounts, if available.
•
You must transfer at least $100 per transfer.
22
•
If less than $100 remains in any Variable Portfolio or Fixed Account after a transfer, that amount
must be transferred as well.
Submitting
Transfer Instructions
Your transfer instructions must be received via one of the
methods and locations referenced below; otherwise they will not be considered received
by us. Please see SHORT-TERM TRADING POLICIES below
for more information.
| Telephone: (800) 445-7862 |
| Internet:
www.corebridgefinancial.com/annuities |
| United States Postal Service (first-class mail): Annuity Service Center P.O. Box 15570
Amarillo, Texas 79105-5570 |
| Facsimile:
(818) 615-1543 |
Telephone/Internet Authorization
We may accept transfers by telephone or the internet unless you tell us not to on your contract
application. When receiving instructions over the telephone or the internet, we have
procedures to provide reasonable assurance that the transactions executed are genuine. Thus, we are not responsible for any claim, loss or expense from any error resulting from instructions received over
the telephone or the internet. If we fail to follow our procedures, we may be liable
for any losses due to unauthorized or fraudulent instructions.
If your contract was issued in the state of New York, we
may accept transfers by telephone if you complete and send the Telephone Transfer
Agreement form to our Annuity Service Center at the above address.
Transfer Fees
There is no charge for your first 15 transfers in any
contract year. We charge for transfers in excess of 15 in any contract year. The fee is $25 for each transfer exceeding this limit. Transfers resulting from your participation in the DCA or Automatic Asset
Rebalancing Programs are not counted towards the number of free transfers per contract
year.
Please see APPENDIX C - STATE CONTRACT AVAILABILITY AND/OR VARIABILITY for state-specific fees.
Accepting Transfer Requests
We cannot guarantee that we will be able to accept telephone, fax and/or internet transfer
instructions at all times. Any telephone, fax or computer system, whether it is yours,
your broker-dealer’s, or ours, can experience outages or delays for a variety of reasons and may prevent our
processing of your
transfer request. If telephone, fax and/or internet access is unavailable, you must make your transfer request in writing by U.S. Mail to our Annuity Service Center at the address above.
We reserve the right to modify, suspend or terminate telephone,
fax and/or internet transfer privileges at any time and we will notify you prior to exercising the right of suspension.
Pricing Transfer Requests
Any transfer request will be priced as of the day it is received by us in Good Order if the request
is received before Market Close. If the transfer request is received after Market
Close, the request will be priced as of the next NYSE business day.
Short-Term Trading Policies
This variable annuity contract is not designed to support frequent trading or trading strategies
that seek to benefit from short-term price fluctuations or price inefficiencies in the
Variable Portfolios of this product (“Short-Term Trading”) and we discourage Short-Term Trading as more fully described below.
Risks of Short-Term Trading
Short-Term Trading may create risks that may result in adverse effects on the investment return of
the Underlying Fund in which a Variable Portfolio invests. Such risks may include, but
are not limited to: (1) interference with the management and planned investment strategies of an Underlying Fund; (2) dilution of the interests in the Underlying Fund due to practices such as
“arbitrage”; and/or (3) increased brokerage and administrative costs due to
forced and unplanned fund turnover. These circumstances may reduce the value of the Variable Portfolio. In addition to negatively impacting the Owner, a reduction in contract value may also be
harmful to Annuitants and/or Beneficiaries.
We have adopted the following administrative procedures to discourage Short-Term Trading which are summarized below.
Standard U.S. Mail Policy
Under the Standard U.S. Mail Policy, all transfers must be submitted by U.S. Mail for 12-months. The
15th transfer in a 12-month look-back period (“12-Month Rolling Period”)
triggers the Standard U.S. Mail Policy.
Transfer Requests under the U.S. Mail Policy
•
While the U.S. Mail Policy is in effect, we will not accept transfer requests sent by any other method except U.S. Mail.
•
Transfer requests required to be submitted by U.S. Mail can only be cancelled by a written request sent by U.S. Mail with the appropriate
paperwork received prior to the execution of the transfer.
23
•
All transfers made on the same day prior to Market Close are considered one transfer request for purposes of applying the Short-Term Trading policy and calculating the number of free
transfers.
•
Transfers resulting from your participation in the DCA or Automatic Asset Rebalancing Programs are not included for the purposes of determining the
number of transfers before applying the Standard U.S. Mail Policy.
•
We apply the Standard U.S. Mail Policy uniformly and consistently to all contract Owners except for omnibus group contracts. See Omnibus Group Contracts below for more information.
Example
For example, if you made a transfer on August 21, 2026 and within the previous twelve months (from August 22, 2025 forward) you made 15 transfers including the August 21st transfer, then all transfers made for
twelve months after August 21, 2026 must be submitted by U.S. Mail (from August 22, 2026 through August 21, 2027).
Accelerated U.S. Mail Policy
We may become aware of transfer patterns among the Variable Portfolios and/or Fixed Accounts which appear to be Short-Term Trading or otherwise detrimental to the Variable Portfolios but have not yet triggered
the Standard U.S. Mail Policy described above. If such transfer activity comes to our
attention, we may require you to adhere to our Standard U.S. Mail Policy prior to reaching the specified number of transfers.
Additional Short-Term Trading Restrictions
To the extent we become aware of Short-Term Trading activities which cannot be reasonably controlled
solely by the Standard U.S. Mail Policy or the Accelerated U.S. Mail Policy, we reserve
the right to evaluate, in our sole discretion, whether to:
1.
impose further limits on the size, manner, number and/or frequency of transfers you can make;
2.
impose minimum holding periods;
3.
reject any Purchase Payment or transfer request;
4.
terminate your transfer privileges; and/or
5.
request that you surrender your contract.
We will notify you in writing if your transfer privileges are modified, suspended or terminated. In addition, we reserve the right not to accept or otherwise restrict transfers from a third party acting for you
and not to accept pre-authorized transfer forms.
Enforcement Determination Factors
Some of the factors we may consider when determining whether to accelerate the Standard U.S. Mail Policy, reject transfers or impose other conditions on
transfer privileges include:
•
the number of transfers made in a defined period;
•
the dollar amount of the transfer;
•
the total assets of the Variable Portfolio involved in the transfer and/or transfer requests that represent a significant portion of the total assets of
the Variable Portfolio;
•
the investment objectives and/or asset classes of the particular Variable Portfolio involved in your
transfers;
•
whether the transfer appears to be part of a pattern of transfers to take advantage of short-term
market fluctuations or market inefficiencies;
•
the history of transfer activity in the contract or in other contracts we may offer; and/or
•
other activity, as determined by us, that creates an appearance, real or perceived, of Short-Term Trading or the possibility of Short-Term
Trading.
Applicability to Third Party Trading Services
The Standard and Accelerated U.S. Mail Policies are applied uniformly and consistently to contract Owners utilizing third party trading services/strategies
performing asset allocation services for a number of contract Owners at the same time.
You should be aware that such third party trading services may engage in transfer
activities that can also be detrimental to the Variable Portfolios, including trading
relatively large groups of contracts simultaneously. These transfer activities may not
be intended to take advantage of short-term price fluctuations or price inefficiencies. However, such activities can create the same or similar risks as Short-Term Trading and negatively impact the
Variable Portfolios as described above.
Deterrence Limitations
Notwithstanding the administrative procedures above, there are limitations on the effectiveness of
these procedures. Our ability to detect and/or deter Short-Term Trading is limited by
operational systems and technological limitations, as well as our ability to predict strategies employed by contract Owners (or those acting on their behalf) to avoid detection. We cannot guarantee that we will detect
and/or deter all Short-Term Trading and it is likely that some level of Short-Term
Trading will occur before it is detected and steps are taken to deter it. To the extent that we are unable to detect and/or deter Short-Term Trading, the Variable Portfolios may be negatively impacted as
described above.
Additionally, the Variable Portfolios may be harmed by transfer activity related to other insurance
companies and/or retirement plans or other investors that invest in shares of
24
the Underlying
Fund. Moreover, our ability to deter Short-Term Trading may be limited by decisions by state regulatory bodies and court orders which we cannot predict.
You should be aware that the design of our administrative procedures involves inherently subjective decisions which we attempt to make in a fair and
reasonable manner consistent with the interests of all Owners of this contract. We do not
enter into agreements with contract Owners whereby we permit or intentionally disregard
Short-Term Trading.
Omnibus Group
Contracts
Omnibus group contracts may invest in the same Underlying Funds available in your contract but on an
aggregate, not individual basis. Thus, we have limited ability to detect Short-Term
Trading in omnibus group contracts and the Standard U.S. Mail Policy does not apply to these contracts. Our inability to detect Short-Term Trading may negatively impact the Variable Portfolios as
described above.
We reserve the right to modify the policies and procedures
described in the TRANSFERS DURING THE ACCUMULATION PHASE section at any time. To the extent that we exercise this reservation of rights, we will do so uniformly and consistently unless we disclose otherwise.
Underlying Funds’ Short-Term Trading Policies
Please note that the Underlying Funds have their own policies and procedures (outlined in their respective prospectus) with respect to frequent purchases
and redemptions of their respective shares which may be more or less restrictive than
ours.
•
We reserve the right to enforce these Underlying Fund policies and procedures, including, but not limited to, the right to collect a redemption fee
on shares of the Underlying Fund if imposed by such Underlying Fund’s Board of
Trustees/Directors. As of the date of this prospectus, none of the Underlying Funds
impose a redemption fee.
•
We also reserve the right to reject, with or without prior notice, any purchase, transfer or allocation into a Variable Portfolio if the corresponding
Underlying Fund will not accept such purchase, transfer or allocation for any
reason.
We are obligated to execute instructions from the Underlying Funds to restrict or prohibit further purchases or transfers in an Underlying Fund under
certain circumstances.
Processing Omnibus Orders
Many investments in the Underlying Funds outside of these contracts are omnibus orders from
intermediaries such as other separate accounts or retirement plans. If an Underlying
Fund’s policies and procedures fail to successfully detect and discourage Short-Term Trading, there may be a negative impact to the Owners of the
Underlying Fund. If an Underlying Fund believes that an omnibus order we submit may reflect transfer requests from Owners engaged in Short-Term Trading, the
Underlying Fund may reject the entire omnibus order and delay or prevent us from
implementing your transfer request.
Required Information Sharing
Under rules adopted by the SEC, we also have written
agreements with the Underlying Funds that obligate us to, among other things, provide
the Underlying Funds promptly upon request certain information about you (e.g., your social security number) and your trading activity.
Transfers During the Income Phase
During the Income Phase, only one transfer per month is permitted between the Variable Portfolios.
No other transfers are allowed during the Income Phase. Transfers will be effected for
the last NYSE business day of the month in which we receive your request for the transfer.
You may not use the DCA Program or the Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program during the Income
Phase.
Return Plus
Program
The Return Plus program, available only if we are offering multi-year Fixed Accounts and available
for no additional charge, allocates your investment strategically between the Fixed
Accounts and Variable Portfolios. You decide how much you want to invest and approximately when you want a return of Purchase Payments. We calculate how much of your Purchase Payment to allocate to the
particular Fixed Account to ensure that it grows to an amount equal to your total
Purchase Payment invested under this program. We invest the rest of your Purchase Payment in the Variable Portfolio(s) according to your allocation instructions.
Example of Return Plus Program:
Assume that you want to allocate a portion of your initial Purchase Payment of $100,000 to a
multi-year Fixed Account. You want the amount allocated to the multi-year Fixed Account
to grow to $100,000 in 3 years. If the 3-year Fixed Account is offering a 4% interest
rate, Return Plus will allocate $88,900 to the 3-year Fixed Account to ensure that this amount will grow to $100,000 at the end of the 3-year period. The remaining $11,100 may be allocated among the
Variable Portfolios according to your allocation instructions.
We reserve the right to modify, suspend
or terminate the Return Plus program at any time.
Voting Rights
The Company is the legal owner of the Trusts’ shares. However, when an Underlying Fund
solicits proxies in conjunction with a shareholder vote, we must obtain your
instructions on how to vote those shares. We vote all of the shares we own in
proportion to your instructions. This includes any shares we own on our own behalf. As a result
25
of this
proportionate voting, the vote of a small number of contract Owners can determine the outcome of a vote. Should we determine that we are no longer required to vote in the manner described above, we will
vote the shares in our own right.
Access to your Money
You can access money in your contract in one of the following ways:
•
Partial Withdrawal;
•
Systematic Withdrawal;
•
Total Withdrawal (also known as surrender); or
•
Annuity Income Payment (during Income Phase).
Withdrawals made prior to age 59½ may result in a 10% IRS
penalty tax. Certain Qualified plans restrict and/or prohibit your ability to withdraw money from your contract. Please see TAXES.
Minimum Withdrawal Amount and Minimum Contract Value
| |
Minimum
Withdrawal
Amount |
Minimum
Contract
Value(1) |
| Partial Withdrawal |
$1,000 |
$500
(2) |
| Systematic Withdrawal |
$100
|
$500(2) |
(1)
The value left in any Variable Portfolio or available Fixed Account must be at least $100 after a withdrawal.
(2)
The total contract value must be at least $500 after a withdrawal.
Where permitted by state law, we may terminate your contract if both of the following occur: (1) your contract value is less than $500 as a result of
withdrawals; and (2) you have not made any Purchase Payments during the past three
years. We will provide you with sixty days written notice that your contract is being terminated. At the end of the notice period, we will distribute the contract’s remaining value to
you.
Penalty-Free
Withdrawal Amount
Your contract provides for a penalty-free withdrawal amount each contract year during the applicable
withdrawal period. The penalty-free withdrawal amount is the portion of your contract
that we allow you to take out without being charged a withdrawal charge. The penalty-free withdrawal amount does not reduce the basis used to calculate future annual penalty-free withdrawals and
withdrawal charges.
To determine your penalty-free
withdrawal amount and your withdrawal charge, we refer to two special terms:
“penalty-free earnings” and “total invested amount.”
Penalty-free earnings are equal to your contract value less your total invested amount and may be
withdrawn free of a withdrawal charge at any time, including upon a full surrender of
your contract. Purchase Payments that are no longer subject to a withdrawal charge and not previously
withdrawn may also
be withdrawn free of a withdrawal charge at any time. The total invested amount is the sum of all Purchase Payments less portions of prior withdrawals that reduce your total invested amount as
follows:
•
Penalty-free withdrawals in any year that were in excess of your penalty-free earnings and were based on the portion of the total invested amount
that was no longer subject to withdrawal charges at the time of the withdrawal;
and
•
Any prior withdrawals (including withdrawal charges applicable to those withdrawals) of the total invested amount on which you already paid a
withdrawal charge.
If, in any contract year, you choose to take less than the full
penalty-free withdrawal amount, then you may not carry over the unused amount as an
additional penalty-free withdrawal in subsequent
years.
| During the first contract year, your maximum annual
penalty-free withdrawal amount is the greater
of: |
| (1)your penalty-free earnings; or |
| (2)if you are participating in the Systematic Withdrawal program, a total of 10% of your total invested amount |
| After the first contract year, your maximum annual
penalty-free withdrawal amount is the
greater of: |
| (1)your penalty-free earnings; or |
| (2)10% of the portion of your total invested amount that has been in your contract for at least one year and still subject to a withdrawal charge |
If, in any contract year, you choose to take less than the full
penalty-free withdrawal amount, then you may not carry over the unused amount as an
additional penalty-free withdrawal in subsequent years.
If you participate in the Seasons Rewards program, you will not receive any deferred Payment Enhancement if you fully withdraw a Purchase Payment or if you surrender your contract prior to the corresponding Deferred
Payment Enhancement Date.
Although we do not assess a withdrawal charge when you take a 10% free withdrawal of the total invested amount we will proportionally reduce the amount of
any corresponding Deferred Payment Enhancement. Please see SEASONS REWARDS PROGRAM above.
Assessment of Withdrawal Charges
We deduct a withdrawal charge applicable to any amount of a partial or total withdrawal in excess of your penalty-free withdrawal amount made before the end
of the withdrawal charge period. Before purchasing this contract, you should consider
the effect of withdrawal charges on your investment if you need to withdraw more than the annual
26
penalty-free amount
during the withdrawal charge period. You should fully discuss this decision with your financial representative.
The withdrawal charge percentage is determined by the number of years the Purchase Payment has been in the contract at the time of the withdrawal. Please see WITHDRAWAL CHARGES and EXPENSES.
When you make a partial withdrawal, we deduct it from penalty-free earnings first, any remaining
penalty-free withdrawal amount, and then from the total invested amount on a first-in,
first-out basis. This means that you can also access your Purchase Payments, which are no
longer subject to a withdrawal charge before those Purchase Payments, which are still
subject to the withdrawal charges or higher withdrawal charges.
If you request a total withdrawal (surrender) of your contract,
we may also deduct any premium taxes, if applicable. If you fully
surrender your contract, withdrawal charges will be assessed against the amount of Purchase Payments subject to withdrawal charges. This means
that, if you surrender your contract while withdrawal charges still apply, any prior penalty-free withdrawal amounts taken in the current contract year are not
subtracted from the total Purchase Payments still subject to withdrawal charges. Please see EXPENSES.
Calculating Withdrawal Charges
For the purpose of calculating the withdrawal charge if you request a total withdrawal of your
contract, any prior penalty-free withdrawal amount, including a required minimum
distribution, in the current contract year is not subtracted from the total Purchase Payments still subject to withdrawal charges.
Example:
For example, you make an initial Purchase Payment of $100,000. For purposes of this example we will assume a 0% growth rate over the life of the
contract, no subsequent Purchase Payments and no election of optional features. In
contract year 2, you take out your maximum penalty-free withdrawal of $10,000. After
that penalty-free withdrawal your contract value is $90,000. In the 3rd contract year, you request a total withdrawal of your contract. We will apply the following calculation:
A–(B x C)=D, where:
A=
Your contract value at the time of your request for withdrawal ($90,000)
Your contract value at the time of your request for withdrawal ($90,000)
B=
The amount of your Purchase Payments still subject to withdrawal charge ($100,000)
The amount of your Purchase Payments still subject to withdrawal charge ($100,000)
C=
The withdrawal charge percentage applicable to the age of each Purchase Payment (assuming 6% is the applicable percentage) [B x C=$6,000]
The withdrawal charge percentage applicable to the age of each Purchase Payment (assuming 6% is the applicable percentage) [B x C=$6,000]
D=
Your full contract value ($84,000) available for total withdrawal
Your full contract value ($84,000) available for total withdrawal
Required
Minimum Distributions
If you are taking required minimum distributions applicable to this contract only, we waive any
withdrawal charges applicable to those withdrawals. Please see TAXES
for details regarding required minimum
distributions.
Annuity Income Payments
Any time after your second contract anniversary, you may receive annuity income payments for a specified period of time and at a frequency as elected by you.
We will waive any applicable withdrawal charges upon processing of your request to
annuitize the contract. Please see ANNUITY INCOME
OPTIONS.
Processing Withdrawal Requests
A request to access money from your contract, as outlined above, must be submitted in writing and in
Good Order to the Annuity Service Center at the following address. Withdrawals are
processed effective the date they are deemed in Good Order and payments are made within 7
days. If you take a partial withdrawal, you can choose whether any applicable
withdrawal charges are deducted from the amount withdrawn or from the contract value
remaining after the amount withdrawn. If you fully surrender your contract value, we
deduct any applicable withdrawal charges from the amount
surrendered.
For withdrawals of $500,000 and more, you are required to include a signature guarantee issued by
your broker-dealer which verifies the validity of your
signature.
| Annuity Service Center P.O. Box 15570 Amarillo, TX 79105-5570 |
Any request for withdrawal will be priced as of the day it is
received by us in Good Order at the Annuity Service Center, if the request is received
before Market Close. If the request for withdrawal is received after Market Close, the request will be priced as of the next NYSE business day. Withdrawals are processed effective the date they
are deemed in Good Order and payments are made within 7 days.
We may be required to suspend or postpone the payment of a withdrawal for any period of time when:
(1) the NYSE is closed (other than a customary weekend and holiday closings); (2)
trading with the NYSE is restricted; (3) an emergency exists such that disposal of or determination of the value of shares of the Variable Portfolios is not reasonably practicable; (4) the SEC, by order,
so permits for the protection of contract Owners.
Additionally, we reserve the right to defer payments for a withdrawal from a Fixed Account for up to six months.
Partial, Systematic, and Required Minimum Distributions
Partial withdrawals, systematic withdrawals and required minimum distributions will be made
proportionately from
27
each Variable
Portfolio and the Fixed Account in which you are invested, unless you provide different instructions.
If you surrender your contract, we may deduct any premium taxes, if applicable. Please see EXPENSES.
Systematic Withdrawal Program
During the Accumulation Phase, you may elect to receive
periodic withdrawals under the Systematic Withdrawal Program for no additional charge.
Under the program, you may choose to take monthly, quarterly, semi-annual or annual
payments from your contract. Electronic transfer of these periodic withdrawals to your bank account is available.
Please contact our Annuity Service Center which can provide the necessary enrollment forms. A
withdrawal charge may apply if the amount of the periodic withdrawals in any year
exceeds the penalty-free withdrawal amount permitted each year.
If you elect a
Living Benefit and choose to receive periodic withdrawals under the Systematic Withdrawal Program, you must request withdrawals on the appropriate Living Benefit enrollment form. If we receive your
request on another form, your request will not be processed. The Systematic Withdrawal
Program for contracts with a Living Benefit is designed to provide withdrawal amounts within the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount. Any amounts taken above your Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount
while enrolled in the Systematic Withdrawal Program will eliminate the remaining
systematic withdrawals within the same contract year and may permanently reduce future
guaranteed withdrawal amounts. The systematic withdrawal program will be re-established in the following contract year after such withdrawals, and the annualized systematic withdrawals will be adjusted to account for
the new Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount. If you must take Required Minimum Distributions (RMDs) from this contract and want
to ensure that these withdrawals will not permanently reduce future guaranteed withdrawal amounts, your total distribution(s) during the current contract
year must not exceed the greater of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount under the Living Benefit or the RMD amount as calculated by our Annuity Service
Center. You may establish a systematic withdrawal program to take your RMD, which will
ensure the amount taken does not exceed either the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount
under the Living Benefit or RMD amount as calculated by our Annuity Service Center.
Upon notification of your death, we will terminate the Systematic Withdrawal Program.
We reserve the right to modify, suspend or terminate the
Systematic Withdrawal Program at any time and we will notify you prior to exercising that right.
Nursing Home Waiver
If you are confined to a nursing home for 60 days or longer, we may waive the withdrawal charge on partial or total withdrawals made while you are in a nursing
home or within 90 days after you leave the nursing home.
•
You cannot use this waiver during the first 90 days after your contract is issued.
•
The confinement period for which you seek the waiver must begin after you purchase your contract.
•
We will only waive withdrawal charges on withdrawals paid directly to the contract owner, and
not to a third party or other financial services company.
In order to use this waiver, you must submit the following
documents to the Annuity Service Center:
1)
a doctor’s note recommending admittance to a nursing home;
2)
an admittance form which shows the type of facility you entered; and
3)
the bill from the nursing home which shows that you met the 60 day confinement requirement.
28
Benefits Available Under the Contract
The following tables summarize information about the
benefits available under the contract.
Standard Benefits (No Additional Charge)
| Name of Benefit |
Purpose |
Brief Description of Restrictions / Limitations |
| Standard Death Benefit
(For contracts issued
between August 2, 2004
and December 28, 2006) |
Provides a death benefit
based on the greater of
contract value or net
Purchase Payments |
•Withdrawals may significantly reduce the benefit •Death benefit calculated differently depending on age
and date of contract issuance |
| Standard Death Benefit
(For contracts issued
between October 16, 2000
and August 1, 2004) |
Provides a death benefit
based on the greater of
contract value or net
Purchase Payments with an
added accumulation rate |
•Withdrawals may significantly reduce the benefit •Death benefit calculated differently depending on age
and date of contract issuance |
| Dollar Cost Averaging
(DCA) Fixed Accounts |
Interest is credited to
amounts allocated to a DCA
Fixed Account and your
money is systematically
transferred from the DCA
Fixed Account to one or
more investment options
over a specified period of
time |
•Must be funded with an initial Purchase Payment, not transferred
contract value
•Minimum funding requirements apply •Only 6-month, 12-month, and 2-year periods may be
available •Transfers may only occur on a monthly basis •Availability may be restricted based on date of contract
issuance and election of optional benefits
•Fixed Account options are not eligible to receive DCA transfers •The interest rates applicable to the DCA Fixed Accounts
may differ from those applicable to any other Fixed Account
but will never be less than the minimum guaranteed interest
rate specified in your contract. •Not available if the Seasons Rewards Program was elected. |
| Dollar Cost Averaging
(DCA) Program |
Allows you to have
systematic transfers of a
specified dollar amount or
percentage of contract value
from an investment option
to one or more eligible
investment options |
•Transfers may only occur on a monthly basis and will not count towards
the number of free transfers per contract year
•Minimum per transfer is $100 regardless of source account •Fixed Account options are not eligible to receive DCA
transfers •Upon notification of your death, we will terminate the DCA Program and
transfer the remaining money according to the current allocation
instructions on file |
| Automatic Asset
Rebalancing |
Allows you to have your
investments periodically
rebalanced to your
pre-selected percentages |
•Rebalancing may occur on a quarterly, semi-annual, or annual basis
•Updated rebalancing instructions must be provided upon making a non-automatic transfer, otherwise rebalancing instructions will be
automatically updated
•Upon notification of your death, we will terminate the Automatic Asset
Rebalancing Program
•If you elect an optional Living Benefit, we will automatically enroll you in
the Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program with quarterly
rebalancing |
| Systematic Withdrawal
Program |
Allows you to receive
periodic withdrawals from
your contract |
•Minimum withdrawal amount is $100 •Withdrawals may occur on a monthly, quarterly,
semi-annual, or annual basis
•Participation in program may be restricted if optional Living Benefit
elected
•Upon notification of your death, we will terminate the Systematic
Withdrawal Program |
| Automatic Payment Plan |
Allows you to make
automatic Purchase
Payments |
•Minimum requirements for the initial and subsequent
Purchase Payments and age restrictions apply
•May not be available with election of certain Living Benefit features |
29
Optional Benefits No Longer Available For Election
| Name of
Benefit |
Purpose |
Maximum Fee |
Brief Description of Restrictions/Limitations |
| Seasons Income
Rewards |
A guaranteed minimum
withdrawal benefit with a
step-up opportunity |
0.65%
(as a percentage of
the Withdrawal
Benefit Base) |
•Withdrawals may significantly reduce or eliminate the benefit or any Step-Up Amount •May not be canceled once elected
•The benefit is based on the Purchase Payments received within 90 days of the contract issue •For contracts issued in Washington, the entire fee will be
deducted from the portion of your contract value allocated
to the Variable Portfolios
•Does not guarantee lifetime income payments |
| Seasons
Promise |
Guarantees a minimum
account value on the 10th
contract anniversary |
0.50%
(as a percentage of
contract value minus
Purchase Payments
received after the
90th day since the
contract issue date) |
•Withdrawals may significantly reduce the benefit •The benefit is based on the Purchase Payments received
within 90 days of the contract issue
•Cannot be canceled prior to the
10th contract
anniversary •The feature will no longer be available if a death benefit is paid or if the contract is fully surrendered or annuitized before the 10th contract anniversary •For contracts issued in Washington, the entire fee will be
deducted from the portion of your contract value allocated
to the Variable Portfolios
•Payment Enhancements and spousal continuation contributions, if applicable, are not considered Purchase Payments and are not used in the calculation of the Benefit Base |
| Income
Protector |
A guaranteed minimum
income benefit that can
offer ability to receive fixed
income payments during
Income Phase |
0.10%
(as a percentage of
the Income Benefit
Base) |
•Withdrawals may significantly reduce the benefit •May not be canceled once elected
•May not begin income for at least 10 years after election of benefit •May not elect this feature if the required waiting period
before beginning the Income Phase would occur later than
your Latest Annuity Date
•If available and elected a growth rate can provide increased income •May only elect to begin the Income Phase using the Income
Protector within the 30 days after the 10th or later contract
anniversary following the effective date of electing benefit or
Re-Set if applicable.
•Qualified contracts may limit the benefit of the Income Protector to not exceed life expectancy. |
| MarketLock
Living Benefit |
A guaranteed minimum
withdrawal benefit with
step-up opportunities |
0.65%
Two Covered Persons
(as a percentage of
the MAV Benefit
Base) |
•Excess withdrawals may significantly reduce or terminate
the benefit
•The fee and investment requirements may change if you elect a step-up period extension •The benefit is based Purchase Payments received during the
first 2 contract years
•Ineligible for step-up period extension if age requirements are not satisfied •May be terminated by you on the 5th or 10th benefit
anniversary or any benefit anniversary
thereafter •Certain events will automatically terminate the benefit •May not be re-elected or reinstated after
termination •Fee may be deducted pro rata from variable portfolios only in certain states. Please see APPENDIX C –
STATE CONTRACT AVAILABILITY AND/OR
VARIABILITY for specific states |
30
Optional Benefits No Longer Available For Election
(continued)
| Name of
Benefit |
Purpose |
Maximum Fee |
Brief Description of Restrictions/Limitations |
| MarketLock
For Two Living
Benefit |
A guaranteed minimum
withdrawal benefit for two
covered persons with
step-up opportunities |
0.40% prior to your
1st withdrawal /
0.80% after your 1st
withdrawal
(as a percentage of
the MAV Benefit
Base) |
•Excess withdrawals may significantly reduce or terminate the benefit •The fee and investment requirements may change if you
elect a step-up period extension
•The benefit is based Purchase Payments received during the first 2 contract years •Ineligible for step-up period extension if age
requirements are not satisfied
•May be terminated by you on the 5th or 10th benefit anniversary or any benefit anniversary thereafter •Certain events will automatically terminate the
benefit •May not be re-elected or reinstated after termination •Fee may be deducted pro rata from variable portfolios only
in certain states. Please see APPENDIX C – STATE CONTRACT AVAILABILITY AND/OR VARIABILITY for specific states |
| Maximum
Anniversary
Death Benefit |
Provides a death benefit
based on the greatest of
contract value, net purchase
payments, or highest
contract value on an eligible
contract anniversary |
0.15%
(as a percentage of
average daily ending
net asset value
allocated to the
Variable Portfolios) |
•Withdrawals may significantly reduce the benefit •Death benefit calculated differently depending on age and
date of contract issuance
•Death benefit equals contract value if age 90 or older at time of death |
| Purchase
Payment
Accumulation
Death Benefit |
Provides a death benefit
based on the greatest of
contract value, Net
Purchase Payments
accumulated at an annual
growth rate, or the contract
value on the seventh
contract anniversary |
0.15%
(as a percentage of
average daily ending
net asset value
allocated to the
Variable Portfolios) |
•Withdrawals may significantly reduce the benefit •Can only be elected prior to your 75th birthday
•Death benefit calculated differently depending on age and date of contract issuance •Death benefit election cannot be changed
•]Death benefit equals Standard Death Benefit if death occurs after the Latest Annuity Date. |
| EstatePlus
Benefit |
Increases the death benefit
amount if there are
earnings in the contract at
the time of death |
0.25%
(as a percentage of
average daily ending
net asset value
allocated to the
Variable Portfolios) |
•Withdrawals may significantly reduce the
benefit •Can only be elected with the Maximum Anniversary Value or the Purchase Payment Accumulation death benefit at contract issue •Not available if age 81 or older at the time of contract
issue •May not be terminated •Not available after Latest Annuity Date
•The contract year of owner’s death and age at issue determines the Estate Plus Percentage and the Maximum EstatePlus Benefit •Purchase Payments received after the 5th contract
anniversary must remain in the contract for at least 6 full
months to be included as part of Net Purchase Payments for
the death benefit calculation
•EstatePlus may not be available in your state or through the broker-dealer with which your financial representative is affiliated. •If a Continuing Spouse is age 81 or older on the
Continuation Date, they may continue the contract only and
may not continue the EstatePlus feature |
Optional Living Benefits
MarketLock and MarketLock For Two
MarketLock and MarketLock For Two are optional guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefits that guarantee
an income stream based on Purchase Payments made during the first two contract years
and only guarantee lifetime withdrawals in the manner described below. These features
may not be
appropriate if you plan to make ongoing Purchase Payments, such as with contributory IRA’s or tax-qualified plans.
Withdrawals under the features are treated like any other withdrawal for the purpose of calculating taxable income,
deducting applicable withdrawal charges, and reducing the contract value, free withdrawal amounts and all other benefits, features and conditions of your
contract.
31
Any withdrawals
taken may be subject to a 10% IRS tax penalty if you are under age 59½ at the time of the withdrawal. For information about how the feature is treated for income tax purposes, you should
consult a qualified tax advisor concerning your particular circumstances. In addition,
if you have a Qualified contract, tax law and the terms of the plan may restrict withdrawal amounts.
MarketLock
For contracts issued prior to May 1, 2006, MarketLock guarantees annual withdrawals based on the
Maximum Anniversary Value (MAV) during the first 10 years of the contract. In addition,
for contracts issued on or after May 1, 2006, if the Owner begins withdrawals after age 65, the withdrawal amount is guaranteed to last for life.
MarketLock Summary Table:
| Time of First
Withdrawal |
Maximum
Annual
Withdrawal
Percentage*
prior
to any Extension |
Initial
Minimum
Withdrawal
Period prior
to any
Extension |
Maximum
Annual
Withdrawal
Percentage if
Extension is
Elected |
| Before 5th Benefit
Year anniversary |
5% |
20 years |
5% |
| On or after 5th Benefit
Year anniversary |
7% |
14.28 years |
7% |
| On or after 10th
Benefit Year
anniversary |
10% |
10 years |
7% |
| On or after 20th
Benefit Year
anniversary |
10% |
10 years |
10% |
| On or after the older
contract Owner’s
65th birthday** |
5% |
Life of the
older contract
Owner |
5% |
*
For the purposes of complying with the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage, the amount of the withdrawal would include any charges applicable to the withdrawal. If
you are taking required minimum distributions (“RMD”) from the contract, and the portion of the RMD amount based on this contract only is greater than the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, that portion
of the withdrawal will not be treated as an Excess Withdrawal. Any portion of the RMD withdrawal that is based on amounts greater than this contract alone will be considered an Excess Withdrawal.
This will result in cancellation of the lifetime withdrawals and may further reduce your Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, MAV Benefit Base, and remaining Minimum Withdrawal Period. If you must take RMD
from this contract and want to ensure that these withdrawals are not considered Excess
Withdrawals under the feature, your total distribution(s) during the current contract
year must not exceed the greater of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount or the RMD amount as calculated by our Annuity Service Center. If you are purchasing this contract by transferring from another IRA and plan
to immediately utilize this feature to satisfy RMD, you should take the current year required withdrawal prior to moving your money to this contract since we can only provide one RMD withdrawal
per contract year (which may cross over two tax years). Further, if the RMD basis for this tax year was calculated by the investment company from which you are transferring your investment and it is greater
than the amount transferred to this contract, we cannot systematically calculate and support the RMD basis. Therefore, you should take the RMD before transferring your investment. Please see “How are the components for MarketLock and MarketLock For Two calculated?” below.
**
For contracts issued on or after May 1, 2006, lifetime withdrawals are available provided that as your first withdrawal is taken on or after age 65 and withdrawals do not
exceed the 5% Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage indicated above. If withdrawals exceed the 5% Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage in any Benefit Year (other than for RMD amounts for this contract
that are greater than the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount), lifetime withdrawals are no
longer available. Instead, available withdrawals are automatically recalculated with
respect to the Minimum Withdrawal Period and Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage listed in the table above, based on the time of first withdrawal and reduced for withdrawals already taken.
MarketLock For Two Summary
Table:
| Age of the Younger Spouse
at Time of First Withdrawal |
Maximum Annual
Withdrawal
Percentage* |
| At least age 55 but prior to 63rd birthday |
4% |
| At least age 63 but prior to 76th birthday |
5% |
| On or after 76th birthday |
6% |
*
If you are taking required minimum distributions (“RMD”) from the
contract, and the portion of the RMD amount based on this contract is greater than the
Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount (defined below), that portion of the withdrawal will not be treated as an Excess Withdrawal. Any portion of a RMD withdrawal that is based on amounts other than this contract will not
be considered a RMD from this contract. Please see
“What are the effects of withdrawals on MarketLock and MarketLock For Two?” below.
How are the components for MarketLock and MarketLock For Two calculated?
First, we determine the Eligible Purchase Payments, which include the amount of Purchase Payments received during the first two years after your contract issue date, adjusted for any withdrawals during that
period. Any Purchase Payments we receive more than two years after your contract issue
date are considered Ineligible Purchase
Payments. We will not accept subsequent Purchase Payments after the 2nd contract year. The calculation of Eligible Purchase Payments does not include
any Payment Enhancements and/or spousal continuation contributions, if applicable;
however, Payment Enhancements and/or spousal continuation contributions are included in the calculation of Anniversary Values, as defined below. Eligible Purchase Payments are limited to $1.5 million without
prior Company approval.
Second, we consider the MAV Evaluation Period, which begins on your contract issue date and ends on your 10th contract anniversary. On the expiration of the MAV Evaluation Period, you may contact us to extend
the MAV Evaluation Period for an additional period as discussed further below.
Third, we determine the Anniversary Value which equals the value of your contract on any contract anniversary during the MAV Evaluation Period minus any
Ineligible Purchase Payments.
Fourth, we determine the MAV Benefit Base. Initially, the MAV Benefit Base equals the first Eligible Purchase Payment. Thereafter, the MAV Benefit Base is increased each time subsequent Eligible Purchase
Payments are made, and adjusted each time any withdrawals (Excess
32
Withdrawals for
MarketLock For Two) of contract value are taken. On each contract anniversary throughout the MAV Evaluation Period, the MAV Benefit Base automatically adjusts upwards if the current Anniversary
Value is greater than both the current MAV Benefit Base and any previous year’s
Anniversary Value. Other than adjustments made for withdrawals (Excess Withdrawals for MarketLock For Two), the MAV Benefit Base will only be adjusted upwards, and subsequent lower Anniversary Values
through the MAV Evaluation Period will not result in a lower MAV Benefit Base.
Fifth, we determine the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, which represents the maximum amount that may be withdrawn each Benefit Year under the features and
is an amount calculated by multiplying the current MAV Benefit Base by the applicable
Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage. The applicable Maximum Annual Withdrawal
Percentage differs by feature as follows:
MarketLock: The applicable Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage
is determined based on the Benefit Year when you take your first withdrawal. Or, for
contracts issued on or after May 1, 2006, the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage is determined based on whether you are taking lifetime withdrawals.
MarketLock For Two: The applicable Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage is determined based on the younger spouse’s age when you take your first
withdrawal.
If the MAV Benefit Base is increased to the current Anniversary Value, the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount is recalculated on that contract anniversary
by multiplying the new MAV Benefit Base by the applicable Maximum Annual Withdrawal
Percentage. If the MAV Benefit Base is increased for Eligible Purchase Payments, the
Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount will be recalculated upon receipt of each Eligible Purchase Payment by multiplying the new MAV Benefit Base by the applicable Maximum Annual Withdrawal
Percentage.
Finally, for MarketLock only, we determine the Minimum Withdrawal Period, which is the minimum period over which you may take withdrawals under the feature. The initial Minimum Withdrawal Period is calculated when withdrawals under the Benefit begin and is
recalculated when the MAV Benefit Base is adjusted to a higher Anniversary Value by
dividing the MAV Benefit Base by the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount. The Minimum
Withdrawal Periods will be reduced due to Excess Withdrawals.
Can I extend the MAV Evaluation Period beyond 10 years?
Yes, the MAV Evaluation Period may be extended as long
as the Benefit is still in effect and the older Owner (younger spouse for MarketLock
For Two) is age 85 or younger at the time extension is elected. We guarantee that you
will be given the opportunity to extend the MAV
Evaluation Period under these conditions for at least one additional evaluation period of 10 years.
In order to extend the MAV Evaluation Period, you
must contact us no later than 30 days after the end of the current MAV Evaluation Period. If you elect to extend the MAV Evaluation Period, the MAV Benefit Base can continue to be adjusted upward as described above on
each anniversary during the new MAV Evaluation Period. Please see “How are the components
of MarketLock and MarketLock For Two
calculated?” above. Also, if you extend the MAV Evaluation Period, you should
note that the components of the feature, such as the fee (and Maximum Annual Withdrawal
Percentage for MarketLock), will change to those in effect at the time you elect to extend, which may be different from the components when you initially elected the feature. We will notify you in
writing of the terms of the extension at least 30 days prior to the end of the MAV
Evaluation Period. Additional MAV Evaluation Periods may be offered at our sole
discretion.
If you do not contact us to extend the MAV Evaluation Period, the MAV Benefit Base will no longer be
adjusted on subsequent contract anniversaries. However, you can continue to take the
Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount in effect at the end of the last MAV Evaluation Period,
subject to adjustments for withdrawals, (Excess Withdrawals for MarketLock For Two).
You will continue to pay the fee at the rate that was in effect during the last MAV
Evaluation Period and you will not be permitted to extend the MAV Evaluation Period in the future.
What are the fees for MarketLock and MarketLock For Two?
The annualized fee for MarketLock is calculated as 0.65% of the MAV Benefit Base for all years in
which the feature is in effect. However, if you elect to extend the MAV Evaluation
Period the fee may change at the time of the extension. The fee will be calculated and deducted quarterly from your contract value, starting on the first quarter following your contract issue date and
ending upon termination of the Benefit. We will not assess the quarterly fee if you
surrender or annuitize your contract before the end of a contract quarter.
The annualized fee for MarketLock For Two for all years in which the feature is in effect, is
calculated as 0.40% of the MAV Benefit Base prior to the first withdrawal being taken
and 0.80% of the MAV Benefit Base after the first withdrawal is taken assessed at the
end of the quarter in which the first withdrawal is taken. However, if you elect to
extend the MAV Evaluation Period the fee may change at the time of the
extension.
An increase in the MAV Benefit Base due to an adjustment to a higher Anniversary Value or due to
subsequent Eligible Purchase Payments will result in an increase to the dollar amount
of the fee. The fee will be calculated and deducted quarterly from your contract value, starting on the first quarter following your contract issue date and ending upon
33
termination of the
Benefit. If your contract value and/or MAV Benefit Base falls to zero before the feature has been terminated, the fee will no longer be deducted. However, if the MAV Benefit Base is adjusted upwards
at a later date because the current Anniversary Value is greater than both the current
and any previous Anniversary Values, the calculation and deduction of the fee will resume. We will not assess the quarterly fee if you surrender or annuitize your contract before the end of a contract
quarter.
What are the effects of withdrawals on MarketLock and MarketLock For Two?
MarketLock
The Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, MAV Benefit Base and Minimum Withdrawal Period may change over time as a result of the timing and amounts of
withdrawals.
In addition, for contracts issued on or after May 1, 2006, if you elect to begin withdrawals prior
to your 65th birthday (if jointly owned, prior to the 65th birthday of the older
Owner), you will not be eligible to receive lifetime withdrawals. If you begin
withdrawals on or after your 65th birthday (older Owner’s 65th birthday if jointly owned) and wish to receive lifetime withdrawals, you must withdraw no more than the Maximum Annual Withdrawal
Amount which is calculated as 5% of the MAV Benefit Base. Lifetime withdrawals do not
change unless the MAV Benefit Base increases due to additional Eligible Purchase Payments or if the MAV Benefit Base is stepped-up on a contract anniversary. If the amount of withdrawals, at any
time, exceeds 5% of the MAV Benefit Base in a Benefit Year, you will not receive
lifetime withdrawals. However, you can continue to receive withdrawals over the Minimum
Withdrawal Period in amounts up to the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount as described in
the MarketLock Summary Table and under “How
are the components for MarketLock and MarketLock For Two calculated?” above, based on when you took your first withdrawal and adjusted for withdrawals already taken.
Total withdrawals in any Benefit Year equal to or less than the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount reduce the MAV Benefit Base by the amount of the withdrawal.
Withdrawals in excess of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount are considered Excess
Withdrawals. We define Excess Withdrawals as either: 1) any portion of a withdrawal that
causes the total withdrawals in a Benefit Year to exceed the Maximum Annual Withdrawal
Amount; or 2) any withdrawal in a Benefit Year taken after the Maximum Annual
Withdrawal Amount has been withdrawn. Excess Withdrawals will reduce the MAV Benefit Base by the greater of: (a) the amount of the Excess Withdrawal; or (b) the relative size of the Excess
Withdrawal in relation to the contract value prior to the Excess Withdrawal, as
described below. This means that if contract value is less than the MAV Benefit Base,
withdrawals greater than the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount will result in a
proportionately greater reduction of the MAV Benefit Base
(as described
below), which will be more than the amount of the withdrawal itself. This will also reduce your Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount. The impact of withdrawals and the effect on each component of
MarketLock are further explained below:
MAV Benefit Base: Withdrawals reduce the MAV Benefit Base as follows:
(1)
If the withdrawal does not cause total withdrawals in the Benefit Year to exceed the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, the MAV Benefit Base will be reduced by the amount of the withdrawal;
(2)
Excess Withdrawals reduce the MAV Benefit Base as follows:
If total withdrawals during the Benefit Year,
including the current withdrawal, exceed the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, the MAV
Benefit Base is reduced to the lesser of:
(a)
is the MAV Benefit Base immediately prior to the withdrawal minus the amount of the Excess Withdrawal, or;
(b)
is the MAV Benefit Base immediately prior to the withdrawal reduced in the same proportion by which the contract value is reduced by the amount of the Excess Withdrawal.
Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount: If the sum of withdrawals in a Benefit Year does not exceed the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount for that Benefit
Year, the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount will not change for the next Benefit Year
unless your MAV Benefit Base is adjusted upward. If total withdrawals in a Benefit Year
exceed the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount will
be recalculated on the next contract anniversary. The new Maximum Annual Withdrawal
Amount will equal the new MAV Benefit Base after any withdrawals on that contract
anniversary, divided by the new Minimum Withdrawal Period on that contract anniversary. On that contract anniversary, the new Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount may be lower than your previous
Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount.
Minimum Withdrawal Period: On each contract anniversary, a new Minimum Withdrawal Period is calculated as shown in the table below.
| The Amount Withdrawn
in a Benefit Year |
Effect on Minimum Withdrawal Period |
| Amounts up to the
Maximum Annual
Withdrawal Amount |
New Minimum Withdrawal Period = the
MAV Benefit Base (which includes a
deduction for any previous withdrawals),
divided by the current Maximum Annual
Withdrawal Amount |
| Amounts in excess of the
Maximum Annual
Withdrawal Amount |
New Minimum Withdrawal Period = the Minimum Withdrawal Period as of the prior contract anniversary minus one year |
34
MarketLock
For Two
Any withdrawals in a Benefit Year that in total are less than or equal to the Maximum Annual
Withdrawal Amount, do not reduce the MAV Benefit Base. We define Excess Withdrawals as
either: 1) any portion of a withdrawal that causes the total withdrawals in a Benefit Year to exceed the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount; or 2) any withdrawal in a Benefit Year taken after the Maximum
Annual Withdrawal Amount has been withdrawn. Excess Withdrawals will reduce the MAV
Benefit Base in the same proportion by which the contract value is reduced by the
Excess Withdrawal. Excess Withdrawals also result in a reduction to your Maximum Annual
Withdrawal Amount because it is recalculated after each Excess Withdrawal by
multiplying the reduced MAV Benefit Base by the existing Maximum Annual Withdrawal
Percentage. In addition, if in any year an Excess Withdrawal reduces the contract value
to zero, MarketLock For Two is terminated and you will not continue to receive
withdrawals over your and your spouse’s lifetime. The impact of withdrawals and the effect on each component of MarketLock For Two are further explained below:
MAV Benefit Base: If the sum of withdrawals in any Benefit Year does not exceed the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, the MAV Benefit Base is not
reduced for those withdrawals. Excess Withdrawals as described above reduce the MAV
Benefit Base as follows:
For each Excess Withdrawal taken, the MAV Benefit Base is reduced in the same proportion by which the contract value is reduced by each Excess
Withdrawal.
Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount: The Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount is recalculated each time there is a change in the MAV Benefit
Base. Accordingly, if the sum of withdrawals in any Benefit Year does not exceed the
Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount for that year, the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount
will not change for the next year unless your MAV Benefit Base is adjusted upward (as described above under “How are the components for MarketLock and MarketLock For Two calculated?”). If you take an Excess Withdrawal, the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount will be recalculated by multiplying
the reduced MAV Benefit Base by the existing Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage. This
newly recalculated Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount will be available beginning on the
next contract anniversary and may be lower than your previous Maximum Annual Withdrawal
Amount.
What happens if my contract value is reduced to zero?
MarketLock
If the contract value is zero but the MAV Benefit Base is greater than zero, a Benefit remains
payable under the feature until the MAV Benefit Base is zero. Further, for contracts
issued on or after May 1, 2006, if you are eligible
to take lifetime withdrawals, a Benefit is still payable even if the contract value and MAV Benefit
Base both equal zero. However, the contract’s other benefits will be terminated
once the contract value equals zero. You may not make subsequent Purchase Payments or
transfers and no death benefit or future annuitization payments are available.
Therefore, during times of unfavorable investment performance, withdrawals taken under
the Benefit may reduce the contract value to zero eliminating any other benefits of the
contract.
When the contract value equals zero, to receive any remaining Benefit, you must select one of the
following:
1.
The current Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, paid equally on a monthly, quarterly, semi-annual or annual frequency as selected by you until
either: (a) the time at which the Minimum Withdrawal Period equals zero, or (b) for
contracts issued on or after May 1, 2006, if receiving lifetime withdrawals, the date
of death of the older contract Owner; or
2.
Any option mutually agreeable between you and us.
MarketLock For Two
If the contract value is zero but the MAV Benefit Base
is greater than zero, a Benefit remains payable over your lifetime and the lifetime of
your spouse. However, if due to an Excess Withdrawal, your contract value is reduced to
zero, no Benefit remains.
The contract’s other benefits will be terminated once the contract value equals zero. You may not make subsequent Purchase Payments or transfers and no death
benefit or future annuity payments are available. Therefore, during times of
unfavorable investment performance, withdrawals taken under the benefit may reduce the contract value to zero eliminating any other benefits of the contract.
Except as described above, when the contract value equals zero, to receive any remaining benefit, you may select one of the following:
1.
The current Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, paid equally on a monthly, quarterly, semi-annual or annual frequency as selected by you until the
date of death of the surviving spouse; or
2.
Any option mutually agreeable between you and us.
If you do not select an option, the remaining Benefit will be
paid as the current Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount on a quarterly basis until the
date of death of the surviving spouse.
What happens to MarketLock and MarketLock For Two upon a spousal continuation?
MarketLock
A Continuing Spouse may elect to continue or cancel the feature and its accompanying fee. The
components of the feature will not change as a result of a spousal continuation.
However, for contracts issued on or after May 1, 2006,
35
lifetime
withdrawals or the option to receive lifetime withdrawals will cease upon death of the older Owner. Excluding the lifetime option, a younger Continuing Spouse can elect to receive withdrawals in
accordance with the provisions of the MarketLock Summary Table above based on when the
first withdrawal was taken and adjusted for any withdrawals already taken. In the event of the death of the younger spouse, the older spousal Beneficiary may continue to receive lifetime withdrawals, if
eligible, because they are based on the older Owner’s life.
If the contract Owner elected MarketLock and dies during
the MAV Evaluation Period and the spousal Beneficiary continues the Benefit, we will
continue to re-evaluate the MAV Benefit Base on each contract anniversary during the
MAV Evaluation Period, and any spousal continuation contribution is included in the
calculation of the Anniversary Value. Additionally, the Continuing Spouse may extend the
MAV Evaluation Period an additional period of 10 years provided that (1) the original
Owner did not previously extend the MAV Evaluation Period and (2) the Continuing Spouse
is age 85 or younger at the time they extend the MAV Evaluation Period. Payment Enhancements and spousal continuation contributions are not considered to be Eligible Purchase Payments. However,
Payment Enhancements and spousal continuation contributions are included in the
Anniversary Values for the purpose of determining the MAV Benefit Base during the MAV
Evaluation Period.
MarketLock For Two
The components of the feature will not change as a result of a spousal continuation. A Continuing
Spouse can elect to receive withdrawals in accordance with the provisions of the
MarketLock For Two Summary Table above based on the age of the younger spouse when the
first withdrawal was taken and based on the MAV Benefit Base at the time of spousal
continuation. Alternatively, if contract value is greater than zero, a Continuing Spouse may make a death claim under the death provisions of the contract and terminate the contract and the MarketLock For
Two feature.
If spousal continuation occurs during the MAV Evaluation Period, the Continuing Spouse will continue
to receive any upward adjustments due to market gains to the MAV Benefit Base during
the period and any spousal continuation contribution is included in the Anniversary Value. However, spousal continuation contributions are not considered to be Eligible Purchase Payments. In addition,
the Continuing Spouse will be eligible to extend the MAV Evaluation Period upon the
expiration of the initial period. Please see “Can I extend the MAV Evaluation Period beyond 10 years?”above.
Can my non-spousal Beneficiary elect to receive any remaining withdrawals under
MarketLock upon my death?
For contracts issued on or after May 1, 2006, upon the death of
the older contract Owner, lifetime withdrawals will no longer be available.
If the contract value is greater than zero when the Owner dies, a non-spousal Beneficiary must make a death claim under the contract provisions, which
terminates MarketLock. If the contract value is zero when the Owner dies, meaning that
no death benefit is payable, but the Minimum Withdrawal Period remaining is greater than zero, a non-spousal Beneficiary may elect to continue receiving any remaining withdrawals under the feature.
The other components of the feature will not change. However, the contract and its
other benefits will be terminated.
Can a non-spousal Beneficiary elect to receive any
remaining benefits under MarketLock For Two upon the death of the
second spouse?
No. Upon the death of both spouses, if the contract value is greater than zero, a non-spousal
Beneficiary must make an election under the death provisions of the contract, which
terminates MarketLock For Two.
What happens to MarketLock and MarketLock For Two upon the Latest Annuity Date?
Upon election of any of the options described below, the Accumulation Phase of your contract ends and the Income Phase begins. Therefore, if electing Income
Payments for the life of the Annuitant, upon death, no benefit remains and the contract
and its features will terminate.
MarketLock
If there is remaining contract value and the MAV Benefit Base is greater than zero on the Latest Annuity Date, you must select one of the following:
1.
Annuitize the contract value under the contract’s annuity provisions; or
2.
For contracts issued on or after May 1, 2006, if eligible for lifetime withdrawals, even if the MAV Benefit Base equals zero, elect to receive the
current Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount on the Latest Annuity Date, paid equally on a
monthly, quarterly, semi- annual or annual frequency as selected by you, until your
death; or
3.
Elect to receive your remaining MAV Benefit Base on the Latest Annuity Date paid over the Minimum Withdrawal Period with payments equal to the
current Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount. If withdrawals have not started, your Maximum
Annual Withdrawal Amount and Minimum Withdrawal Period will be calculated based on the
applicable Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage; or
4.
Any option mutually agreeable between you and us.
36
MarketLock
For Two
If there is remaining contract value and the MAV Benefit Base is greater than zero on the Latest
Annuity Date, you must select one of the following:
1.
Annuitize the contract value under the contract’s annuity provisions; or
2.
Elect to receive the current Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount on the Latest Annuity Date, paid equally on a monthly, quarterly, semi-annual or
annual frequency as selected by you until the date of death of the surviving spouse, if
eligible for lifetime withdrawals, even if the MAV Benefit Base is zero; or
3.
Any option mutually agreeable between you and us.
Can MarketLock and MarketLock For Two be cancelled?
MarketLock and MarketLock For Two may be cancelled on the 5th contract anniversary, the 10th
contract anniversary, or any contract anniversary thereafter. Once the feature is
cancelled, you will no longer be charged a fee and the guarantees under the Benefit are
terminated. You may not re-elect the feature after cancellation.
Are there circumstances under which MarketLock
and MarketLock For Two will automatically
terminate?
MarketLock
MarketLock automatically terminates upon the occurrence of one of the following:
1.
The Minimum Withdrawal Period has been reduced to zero unless, for contracts issued on or after May 1, 2006, conditions for lifetime withdrawals
are met; or
2.
Annuitization of the contract; or
3.
Full surrender of the contract; or
4.
Death benefit is paid.
5.
Upon a spousal continuation, the Continuing Spouse elects not to continue the contract with the feature.
For contracts
issued on or after May 1, 2006, lifetime withdrawals will not be available in the event of:
1.
An ownership change which results in a change of the older Owner;* or
2.
Withdrawals prior to the 65th birthday of the older Owner; or
3.
Death of the older Owner; or
4.
A Spousal Continuation (upon the death of the older Owner); or
5.
A withdrawal in excess of 5% of MAV Benefit Base.**
*
If a change of ownership occurs from a natural person to a non-natural entity, the original natural older Owner must also be the annuitant after the ownership change to
prevent termination of lifetime withdrawals. A change of ownership from a non-natural entity to a natural person can only occur if the new natural Owner was the
original natural older annuitant in order to prevent termination of lifetime withdrawals. Any ownership change is contingent upon prior review and approval by the
Company.
**
If a required minimum distribution withdrawal for this contract exceeds the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, the ability to receive lifetime withdrawals will not be
terminated.
MarketLock For Two
MarketLock For Two automatically terminates upon the occurrence of one of the following:
1.
Annuitization of the contract; or
2.
Full surrender of the contract; or
3.
A death benefit is paid and the contract is not continued by the spouse; or
4.
Excess Withdrawals that reduce the contract value to zero which then reduces the MAV Benefit Base to zero; or
5.
Death of surviving original spouse; or
6.
A change in ownership that involves the original Owner(s) except as noted below and under “Are there circumstances under which guaranteed
withdrawals over the lifetime of your spouse are terminated?”*
*
If a change of ownership occurs from a natural person to a non-natural entity, the original natural Owner(s) must also be the annuitant(s) after the ownership change to
prevent termination of MarketLock For Two. A change of ownership from a non-natural entity to a natural person can only occur if the new natural Owner(s) was the original natural annuitant(s) in order to
prevent termination of MarketLock For Two. Any ownership change is contingent upon prior review and approval by the Company.
Are there
circumstances under which guaranteed withdrawals over the lifetime of your spouse are terminated?
Under any of the following circumstances, MarketLock For Two will provide a guarantee for your lifetime and not the lifetime of your spouse:
1.
One of the two original Owners is removed from the contract; or
2.
The original spousal Beneficiary is removed or replaced; or
3.
The original spousal joint Owner or spousal Beneficiary is removed or replaced upon divorce; or
4.
The original spousal joint Owners or spousal Beneficiary are no longer married at the time of death of the first spouse.
Under these circumstances, the original remaining Owner continues
to pay the fee for MarketLock For Two and receives the Benefit for his/her lifetime only, or may choose to terminate the feature as described under “Can MarketLock and MarketLock For Two be cancelled?”
Seasons Income Rewards
Seasons Income Rewards is an optional guaranteed withdrawal benefit that guarantees an income stream based on all Purchase Payments made into your
contract during
37
the first 90 days
after contract issue, with an opportunity for a Step-Up Amount, adjusted for withdrawals during that period (the “Benefit”). Seasons Income Rewards does not guarantee investment gains nor
does it guarantee a withdrawal of any subsequent Purchase Payments made after the 90th
day following the contract issue date. This feature does not guarantee lifetime income payments.
In order to determine the Benefit, we calculate each of the components as described below. The
Benefit’s components and value may vary depending on the option you chose.
Options 1 and 2 are available on contracts issued on and after May 3, 2004. In
addition, Option 3 is available on contracts issued on or after May 2, 2005. The earliest date you may begin taking withdrawals under the Benefit is the Benefit Availability
Date. Each one-year period beginning on the contract issue date and ending on the day
before the contract anniversary date is considered a Benefit
Year.
Seasons Income Rewards Summary:
| Option |
Maximum
Election Age |
Benefit
Availability
Date |
Step-Up
Amount |
Maximum
Annual
Withdrawal
Percentage*** |
Minimum
Withdrawal
Period* (if
Maximum
Annual
Withdrawal
Amount
taken
each year) |
| 1 |
Age 80 or
younger on
the contract
issue date |
3 years
following
contract
issue date |
10%* of
Withdrawal
Benefit
Base |
10% of
Withdrawal
Benefit Base |
11 years |
| 2 |
Age 80 or
younger on
the contract
issue date |
5 years
following
contract
issue date |
20%* of
Withdrawal
Benefit
Base |
10% of
Withdrawal
Benefit Base |
12 years |
| 3 |
Age 70 or
younger on
the contract
issue date |
10 years
following
contract
issue date |
50%** of
Withdrawal
Benefit
Base |
10% of
Withdrawal
Benefit Base |
15 years |
*
If you elect Option 1 or 2 and take a withdrawal prior to the Benefit Availability Date, you will not receive a Step-Up Amount. The Minimum Withdrawal Period for Options 1
and 2 will be 10 years if you do not receive a Step-Up Amount.
**
If you elect Option 3 and take a withdrawal prior to the Benefit Availability Date, you will receive a reduced Step-Up Amount of 30% of the Withdrawal Benefit Base.
The Minimum Withdrawal Period will be 13 years if you receive a reduced Step-Up Amount. For contracts issued prior to June 14, 2005, the Maximum Election Age is 80 or younger on the contract issue
date.
***
For contract holders subject to annual required minimum distributions, the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount will be the greater of: (1) the amount indicated in the table
above; or (2) the annual required minimum distribution amount associated with your contract
value only. Required minimum distributions may reduce your Minimum Withdrawal
Period.
How are the components for Seasons Income Rewards calculated?
First, we determine the Eligible Purchase Payments, which include the amount of Purchase Payments made to the contract during the first 90 days after your contract issue date, adjusted for any withdrawals
before the Benefit Availability Date in the same proportion that the withdrawal
reduced the
contract value on the date of the withdrawal. The calculation of Eligible Purchase Payments does not include any Payment Enhancements and/or spousal continuation contributions, if applicable.
Second, we determine the Withdrawal Benefit Base. On the Benefit Availability Date, the Withdrawal Benefit Base equals the sum of all Eligible Purchase
Payments.
Third, we determine the Step-Up Amount, if any, which is calculated as a specified percentage (listed in the Seasons Income Rewards Summary table above) of
the Withdrawal Benefit Base on the Benefit Availability Date. The Step-Up Amount is not
considered a Purchase Payment and cannot be used in calculating any other benefits, such as death benefits, contract value or annuitization value.
Fourth, we determine the Stepped-Up Benefit Base, which is the total amount available for withdrawal under the feature and is used to calculate the minimum time period over which you may take withdrawals under
the Seasons Income Rewards feature. The Stepped-Up Benefit Base equals the Withdrawal
Benefit Base plus the Step-Up Amount, if any.
Fifth, we determine the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, which is a stated percentage (listed in the Seasons Income Rewards Summary table above) of the Withdrawal Benefit Base and represents the maximum amount
of withdrawals that are available under this feature each Benefit Year after the
Benefit Availability Date.
Finally, we determine the Minimum Withdrawal Period, which is the minimum period over which you may take withdrawals under the Seasons Income Rewards
feature. The Minimum Withdrawal Period is calculated by dividing the Stepped-Up Benefit
Base by the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount.
What is the fee for Seasons Income Rewards?
The annualized Seasons Income Rewards fee will be assessed as a percentage of the Withdrawal Benefit
Base. The fee will be calculated and deducted quarterly from your contract value
starting on the first quarter following the contract issue date and ending upon the termination of the feature. If your contract value falls to zero before the feature has been terminated, the fee will
no longer be assessed. We will not assess the quarterly fee if you surrender or
annuitize before the end of a quarter.
The fee is as follows:
| Contract Year |
Annualized Fee |
| 0-7 years |
0.65% |
| 8-10 years |
0.45% |
| 11+ |
None |
What are the effects of withdrawals on Seasons Income Rewards?
Withdrawals after the Benefit Availability Date equal to or less than the Maximum Annual Withdrawal
Amount
38
generally reduce
the Benefit by the amount of the withdrawal. Withdrawals in excess of the Maximum Annual
Withdrawal Amount will reduce the Benefit in the same proportion that the contract
value was reduced at the time of the withdrawal. This means if investment performance is
down and contract value is reduced, withdrawals greater than the Maximum Annual
Withdrawal Amount will result in a greater reduction of the Benefit. The impact of
withdrawals and the effect on each component of Seasons Income Rewards are further
explained through the calculations below:
Withdrawal Benefit Base: Withdrawals prior to the Benefit Availability Date reduce the Withdrawal Benefit Base in the same proportion that the contract value was reduced at the time of the withdrawal.
Withdrawals prior to the Benefit Availability Date also eliminate any Step-Up Amount
for Options 1 and 2 and reduce the Step-Up Amount to 30% of the Withdrawal Benefit Base
for Option 3. Withdrawals after the Benefit Availability Date will not reduce the Withdrawal Benefit Base until the sum of withdrawals after the Benefit Availability Date exceeds the Step-Up Amount.
Thereafter, any withdrawal or portion of a withdrawal will reduce the Withdrawal
Benefit Base as follows:
(1)
If the withdrawal does not cause total withdrawals in the Benefit Year to exceed the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, the Withdrawal Benefit Base will be reduced by the amount of the withdrawal, or
(2)
If the withdrawal causes total withdrawals in the Benefit Year to exceed the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, the Withdrawal Benefit Base is reduced to the lesser of:
(a)
is the Withdrawal Benefit Base immediately prior to the withdrawal minus the amount of the withdrawal, or;
(b)
is the Withdrawal Benefit Base immediately prior to the withdrawal minus the amount of the withdrawal that is equal to the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, and further reduced in the same proportion by which the contract value is reduced by the amount in excess of the maximum annual withdrawal amount.
Stepped-Up Benefit Base: Since withdrawals prior to the Benefit Availability Date eliminate any Step-Up Amount for Options 1 and 2, the Stepped-Up Benefit Base will be equal to the Withdrawal Benefit Base
if you take withdrawals prior to the Benefit Availability Date. For Option 3, if you
take withdrawals prior to the Benefit Availability Date, the Stepped-Up Benefit Base
will be equal to the Withdrawal Benefit Base plus the reduced Step-Up Amount which will
be 30% of the Withdrawal Benefit Base, adjusted for such withdrawals. If you do not
take withdrawals prior to the
Benefit Availability Date, you will receive the entire Step-Up Amount and the Stepped-Up Benefit
Base will equal the Withdrawal Benefit Base plus the Step-Up Amount.
After the Benefit Availability Date, any withdrawal that does not cause total withdrawals in a
Benefit Year to exceed the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount will reduce the Stepped-Up
Benefit Base by the amount of the withdrawal. After the Benefit Availability Date, any
withdrawal that causes total withdrawals in a Benefit Year to exceed the Maximum Annual
Withdrawal Amount (in that Benefit Year) reduces the Stepped-Up Benefit Base to the
lesser of:
(a)
is the Stepped-Up Benefit Base immediately prior to the withdrawal minus the amount of the withdrawal, or;
(b)
is the Stepped-Up Benefit Base immediately prior to the withdrawal minus the amount of the withdrawal that is equal to the Maximum Annual Withdrawal
Amount, and further reduced in the same proportion by which the contract value is
reduced by the amount in excess of the maximum annual withdrawal amount.
Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount: If the sum of withdrawals in a Benefit Year does not exceed the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount for that Benefit Year, the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount does
not change for the next Benefit Year. If total withdrawals in a Benefit Year exceed the
Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount will be
recalculated at the start of the next Benefit Year. The new Maximum Annual Withdrawal
Amount will equal the Stepped-Up Benefit Base on that Benefit Year anniversary divided by the Minimum Withdrawal Period on that Benefit Year anniversary. The new Maximum Annual Withdrawal
Amount may be lower than your previous Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amounts.
Minimum Withdrawal Period: After each withdrawal, a new Minimum Withdrawal Period is calculated. If total withdrawals in a Benefit Year are less than
or equal to the current Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, the new Minimum Withdrawal
Period equals the Stepped-Up Benefit Base after the withdrawal, divided by the current
Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount.
During any Benefit Year in which the sum of withdrawals exceeds
the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, the new Minimum Withdrawal Period equals the
Minimum Withdrawal Period calculated at the end of the prior Benefit Year reduced by one year.
What happens if my contract value is reduced to zero with Seasons Income
Rewards?
If the contract value is zero but the Stepped-Up Benefit Base is greater than zero, a Benefit
remains payable under
39
the feature until
the Stepped-Up Benefit Base is zero. However, the contract and its features and other benefits will be terminated once the contract value equals zero. Once the contract is terminated, you may not
make subsequent Purchase Payments and no death benefit or future annuitization payments
are available. Therefore, under adverse market conditions, withdrawals taken under the
Benefit may reduce the contract value to zero eliminating any other benefits of the
contract.
To receive your remaining Benefit, you may select one of the following:
1.
The current Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, paid equally on a monthly, quarterly, semi-annual or annual frequency as selected by you until the
Stepped-Up Benefit Base equals zero; or
2.
Any option mutually agreeable between you and us.
If you do not select an option, the remaining Benefit will be
paid as the current Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount on a quarterly basis.
What happens to Seasons Income Rewards upon a spousal continuation?
A Continuing Spouse may elect to continue or cancel the feature and its accompanying fee. The
components of the feature will not change as a result of a spousal continuation.
However, continuation contributions are not considered to be Eligible Purchase
Payments.
Can my non-spousal Beneficiary elect to receive any remaining withdrawals under
Seasons Income Rewards upon my death?
If the contract value is greater than zero when the
Owner dies, a non-spousal Beneficiary must make a death claim under the contract
provisions, which terminates Seasons Income Rewards. If the contract value is zero when the Owner dies, meaning that no death benefit is payable, but the Stepped-Up Benefit Base is greater
than zero, a non-spousal Beneficiary may elect to continue receiving any remaining
withdrawals under the feature. The components of the feature will not change.
Can Seasons Income Rewards be cancelled?
Once you elect Seasons Income Rewards, you may not cancel the feature. However, there is no charge for Seasons Income Rewards after the 10th contract
anniversary.
Additionally, the feature automatically terminates upon the occurrence of one of the
following:
1.
The Stepped-Up Benefit Base is equal to zero; or
2.
Annuitization of the contract; or
3.
Full surrender of the contract; or
4.
Death benefit is paid; or
5.
Upon a spousal continuation, the Continuing Spouse elects not to continue the contract with the feature.
6.
For contracts issued from May 3, 2004 through October 3, 2004, withdrawals in excess of Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount in any Benefit Year
reduce the Stepped-Up Benefit Base by 50% or more.
What happens to Seasons Income Rewards upon the
Latest Annuity Date?
If your contract value and Stepped-Up Benefit Base are greater than zero, and you begin the Income Phase upon or before the Latest Annuity Date, you will
not receive the benefit of any remaining guaranteed withdrawals under the feature. Your
annuity income payments will be calculated using your contract value and the selected income option.
Withdrawals under this feature are treated like any other withdrawal for the purpose of reducing the
contract value, free withdrawal amounts and all other benefits, features and conditions
of your contract.
If you elect Seasons Income Rewards and need to take withdrawals or are required to take required
minimum distributions (“RMD”) under the Internal Revenue Code from your
contract prior to the Benefit Availability Date, you should know that such withdrawals may negatively affect the value of the Benefit.
Any withdrawals taken may be subject to a 10% IRS tax penalty if you are under age 59½ at the time of the withdrawal. For information about how the
feature is treated for income tax purposes, you should consult a qualified tax advisor
concerning your particular circumstances. If you set up RMDs and have elected this
feature, your withdrawals must be automated and will not be recalculated on an annual
basis.
Seasons Promise
Seasons Promise is an optional guaranteed minimum accumulation benefit. The feature provides a one-time adjustment (“Benefit”) to your
contract in the event that your contract value on the 10th contract anniversary
(“Benefit Date”) is less than the Purchase Payments made in the
contract’s first 90 days.
Generally, this feature and its corresponding charge cannot be
cancelled or terminated prior to the Benefit Date. The feature terminates automatically following the Benefit Date. In addition, the feature will no longer be available and no Benefit will be paid if a death benefit
is paid or if the contract is fully surrendered or annuitized before the Benefit
Date.
The Benefit is equal to your Benefit Base, as defined below, minus your contract value on the Benefit Date. If the resulting amount is positive, you will receive
a Benefit under the feature. If the resulting amount is negative, you will not receive
a Benefit.
40
Your Benefit Base
is equal to (a) minus (b) where:
(a)
is the Purchase Payments received on or after the contract issue date in the contract’s first 90 days, and;
(b)
is an adjustment for all withdrawals and applicable fees and charges made subsequent to the contract issue date, in an amount proportionate to the
amount by which the withdrawal decreased the contract value at the time of the
withdrawal.
Payment Enhancements and spousal continuation contributions, if applicable, are not considered Purchase Payments and are not used in the
calculation of the Benefit Base.
The annualized fee is calculated as a percentage of contract value minus Purchase Payments received after the 90th day since the contract issue date. The fee
will be calculated and deducted from your contract value each quarter throughout the
first 10 full contract years, beginning at the end of the first contract quarter following the contract issue date and up to the Benefit Date. Once the feature is terminated, the charge will no longer be deducted. We
will also not assess the quarterly fee if you surrender or annuitize before the end of
the quarter.
For contracts issued between May 3, 2004 and December 28, 2006, the fee is as follows:
| Contract Year |
Annualized Fee |
| 0-7 |
0.50% |
| 8-10 |
0.25% |
| 11+ |
none |
For contracts issued between February 10, 2003 and April 30, 2004, the fee is as follows:
| Contract Year |
Annualized Fee |
| 0-7 |
0.45% |
| 8-10 |
0.15% |
| 11+ |
none |
For contracts issued between August 1, 2002 and February 7, 2003, the fee is as follows:
| Contract Year |
Annualized Fee |
| 0-7 |
0.35% |
| 8-10 |
0.10% |
| 11+ |
none |
If your spouse chooses to continue this contract upon your death, this feature cannot be terminated
and the fee will continue to be charged. The Benefit Date will not change as a result
of a spousal continuation.
Seasons Promise only guarantees Purchase Payments made in the first 90 days after issue. If you plan
to add subsequent Purchase Payments after the first 90 days, you should know that
Seasons Promise will not protect those Purchase Payments.
Since Seasons Promise may not guarantee a return of all Purchase Payments, it is important to
realize that subsequent Purchase Payments made into the contract may decrease the value
of the Benefit. For example, if you are approaching the Benefit Date and your Benefit Base is greater than your contract value, and you then make a subsequent Purchase Payment that causes your
contract value to be larger than your Benefit Base on your Benefit Date, you will not
receive any Benefit even though you have paid for Seasons Promise throughout the first 10 full contract years.
We will allocate the Benefit, if any, on the Benefit Date to the SA JPMorgan Ultra-Short Bond Portfolio. Any Benefit paid is not considered a Purchase Payment
for purposes of calculating other benefits or features of your contract. Other contract
benefits based on earnings, will continue to define earnings as the difference between contract value and Purchase Payments adjusted for withdrawals. For information about how the Benefit is treated for
income tax purposes, you should consult a qualified tax advisor for information
concerning your particular circumstances.
Please see APPENDIX E – OPTIONAL LIVING BENEFIT EXAMPLES for examples of how your Living Benefit is
calculated.
Income Protector
Income Protector is an optional minimum income benefit, available for an additional charge and provides a future “safety net” which can offer
you the ability to receive a guaranteed fixed minimum retirement income when you switch
to the Income Phase. If you elect Income Protector, you can know the level of minimum income that will be available to you upon annuitization, regardless of fluctuating market conditions. Income Protector
is available on contracts issued prior to May 3, 2004.
The minimum level of Income Protector benefit available
is generally based upon the Purchase Payments remaining in your contract at the time
you decide to begin taking income. If available and elected, a growth rate can provide increased levels of minimum guaranteed income.
How We Determine the Amount of Your Minimum Guaranteed Income
If you elect Income Protector, we base the amount of minimum income available to you upon a calculation we call the Income Benefit Base. Your Income
Benefit Base is equal to your contract value on the date of election. Income Protector
is effective on either the date of issue of the contract or at the contract anniversary following your election of Income Protector.
The Income Benefit Base is only a calculation. It does not represent a contract value, nor does it guarantee performance of the Variable Portfolios in which
you invest.
Your Income Benefit Base increases if you make subsequent Purchase Payments and decreases if you
withdraw money
41
from your contract.
The Income Benefit Base is equal to (a) plus (b) minus (c) where:
(a)
is equal to, for the first year of calculation, your initial Purchase Payment, or for each subsequent year of calculation, the Income Benefit Base on the
prior contract anniversary, and;
(b)
is equal to the sum of all subsequent Purchase Payments made into the contract since the date of election, and;
(c)
is equal to all withdrawals and applicable fees and charges since the date of election, in an amount proportionate to the amount by which such withdrawals decreased your contract value.
In order to obtain
the benefit of Income Protector, you may not begin the Income Phase for at least 9 years following election. You may not elect this feature if the required waiting period before beginning the Income
Phase would occur later than your Latest Annuity Date.
Re-Set of Your Income Protector Benefit
You may also have the opportunity to “Re-Set” your Income Benefit Base. The Re-Set
feature allows you to increase your Income Benefit Base to the amount of your contract
value on your next contract anniversary. You can only Re-Set within the 30 days before
your next contract anniversary. Upon a Re-Set, the waiting period before you can begin
the Income Phase will start over. In addition, the Income Protector fee will be charged as a percentage of your Re-Set Income Benefit Base. You may not elect to Re-Set if the required waiting period before
beginning the Income Phase would occur later than your Latest Annuity Date.
Electing to Receive Income Payments
You may elect to begin the Income Phase of your contract using the Income Protector Program only within the 30 days after the 9th or later contract anniversary following the effective date of electing Income Protector or Re-Set, if applicable.
The Income Benefit Date is the contract anniversary date on which the Income Benefit is calculated and applied. This is the date as of which we calculate
your Income Benefit Base to use in determining your guaranteed minimum income payments.
To arrive at the minimum guaranteed income payments available to you, we apply the annuity rates stated in your Income Protector Endorsement for the income option you select to your final
Income Benefit Base. You then choose if you would like to receive that income annually,
quarterly or monthly for the time guaranteed under your selected annuity option. Your final Income Benefit Base is equal to (a) minus (b) where:
(a)
is your Income Benefit Base as of your Income Benefit Date, and;
(b)
is any withdrawal charges calculated as if you fully surrender your contract as of the Income Benefit Date, and any applicable premium taxes.
The annuity income options available under this feature when
using Income Protector to receive your guaranteed income payments
are:
•
Life Annuity with 10 Year Period Certain, or
•
Joint and 100% Survivor Annuity with 20 Year Period Certain
At the time you elect to begin receiving annuity income payments, we will calculate your annual guaranteed income payments using both your final Income
Benefit Base and your contract value. We will use the same income option for each
calculation; however, the annuity factors used to calculate your guaranteed income payments under Income Protector will be different. You will receive whichever provides a greater stream of income. If you
annuitize using Income Protector, your annuity income payments will be fixed in amount.
You are not required to use Income Protector to receive income payments. However, we will not refund fees paid for Income Protector if you annuitize under the annuity provisions of your
contract.
You may never need to rely upon the Income Protector, if your contract performs within a
historically anticipated range. However, past performance is no guarantee of future
results.
Fees Associated with the Income Protector Program
The fee is 0.10% of the Income Benefit Base. We deduct the annual fee from your contract value. If
you elect Income Protector at issue, we begin deducting the annual fee on your first
contract anniversary. If you elect the feature at some later date, we begin deducting the annual fee on the contract anniversary following the date of election. Upon a Re-Set, the fee will be charged based
upon your Re-Set Income Benefit Base.
It is important to note that once you elect Income Protector, you may not cancel your election. We will deduct the charge from your contract value on every
contract anniversary up to and including your Income Benefit Date. Additionally, we
deduct the full annual fee from your contract value upon surrender.
Note to Qualified Contract Holders
Qualified contracts generally require that you select an annuity income option that does not exceed your life expectancy. That restriction, if it applies to
you, may limit the benefit of Income Protector. To utilize Income Protector, you must
take annuity income payments under one of the two annuity income options described above. If those annuity income options exceed your life expectancy, you may be prohibited from receiving your
guaranteed income payments under the feature. If you own a Qualified contract to which
these restrictions apply and you elect Income Protector, you may pay for this feature and not be able to
42
realize the
benefit. A guarantee of payments greater than 10 years may not be available to all Beneficiaries. Under certain circumstances the Beneficiary's annuity income payments may be limited based on the Internal
Revenue Code.
You should consult your tax advisor for information concerning your particular circumstances.
Please see APPENDIX E – OPTIONAL LIVING BENEFIT EXAMPLES for examples of how your Living Benefit is
calculated.
MARKETLOCK AND MARKETLOCK FOR TWO EXTENSION parameters
The information below is important to you if you purchased a contract between August 31, 2005 and May 1, 2009 and you elected the MarketLock Living Benefit or if you purchased a contract between July 10, 2006 and April 30, 2008 and you elected MarketLock For Two Living Benefit. As described in the prospectus, the initial MAV Evaluation Period ends after the tenth contract year. On or about your tenth contract anniversary you will have
an opportunity to extend the MAV Evaluation Period (the “Extension”) for an
additional ten years. In choosing the Extension, your fee will change as detailed
below. No other parameters or terms of your current benefit will change as a result of the Extension.
If you do not wish to elect the Extension, no further action is required by you. Your benefit will continue without change. You will continue to pay the same fee
and can take the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount in effect at the end of the MAV
Evaluation Period. However, your MAV Benefit Base will no longer be adjusted for higher
anniversary values. Please note that if you do not elect the Extension when it is
offered, you will not be permitted to extend the MAV Evaluation Period in the future.
As with all important financial decisions, we recommend that you discuss this with your financial
representative.
For information on the MarketLock or MarketLock For Two Living Benefit you elected at the time of
purchase, please see the MarketLock or MarketLock For
Two section under OPTIONAL LIVING BENEFITS in the
prospectus.
How do I elect the Extension?
To elect the Extension, you must complete the Election Form you will receive. The terms of the
Extension for contracts purchased between the dates noted above for the applicable
features are detailed below. The MAV Evaluation Period may be extended for an additional 10 year period.
What is the fee if I elect the Extension?
If you elect the MarketLock Extension, the fee for the Living Benefit will be increased by 0.25% as follows:
| Current
Annualized Fee |
Annualized Fee
After Extension |
| 0.65% |
0.90% |
If you elect the MarketLock For Two Extension, the fee for the Living Benefit will be increased by 0.25% as follows:
| Current
Annualized Fee |
Annualized Fee
After Extension |
| 0.40% prior to your 1st withdrawal |
0.65% prior to your 1st withdrawal |
| 0.80% after your 1st withdrawal |
1.05% after your 1st withdrawal |
As a reminder, you also have the option to cancel your MarketLock or MarketLock For Two Living
Benefit on your tenth contract anniversary, or any contract anniversary thereafter. If
you elect to cancel your Living Benefit, you will no longer receive the guarantees of the MarketLock or MarketLock For Two benefit and you will no longer be charged the fee.
MARKETLOCK and Marketlock for Two SECOND EXTENSION parameters
The information below is important to you if you purchased a contract between August 31, 2005 and May 1, 2009 and you elected the MarketLock Living Benefit or if you purchased a contract between July 10, 2006 and April 30, 2008 and you elected MarketLock For Two Living Benefit. As described in the prospectus, the initial MAV Evaluation Period ends after the tenth contract year. On or about your tenth contract anniversary you had an
opportunity to extend the MAV Evaluation Period (the “Extension”) for an
additional ten years. If you elected the first Extension, you will have the opportunity
to elect a second Extension on or about your tenth contract anniversary. In choosing the
second Extension, your fee will change as detailed below. No other parameters or terms
of your current benefit will change as a result of the Extension.
If you do not wish to elect the second
Extension, no further action is required by you. Your benefit will continue without
change. You will continue to pay the same fee and can take the Maximum Annual
Withdrawal Amount in effect at the end of the MAV Evaluation Period. However, your MAV
Benefit Base will no longer be adjusted for higher anniversary values. Please note that
if you do not elect the Extension when it is offered, you will not be permitted to
extend the MAV Evaluation Period in the future.
As with all important financial decisions, we recommend that you discuss this with your financial representative.
For information on the MarketLock Living Benefit you elected at the time of purchase, please see the MarketLock and MarketLock for Two section under OPTIONAL LIVING BENEFITS in the prospectus.
43
How do I
elect the second Extension?
If you are eligible for the second Extension because you
previously elected the first Extension and wish to elect the second Extension, you must
complete the Election Form you will receive. The terms of the Extension for contracts
purchased between the dates noted above for the applicable features are detailed below.
The MAV Evaluation Period may be extended for an additional 10 year period.
What is the fee if I elect the second Extension?
If you elect the MarketLock second Extension, the fee for the Living Benefit will be increased by 0.05% as follows:
| Current
Annualized Fee After First
Extension |
Annualized Fee
After Second Extension |
| 0.90% |
0.95% |
If you elect the MarketLock for Two second Extension, the fee for the Living Benefit will be increased by 0.05% as follows:
| Current
Annualized Fee After First
Extension |
Annualized Fee
After Second Extension |
| 0.65% prior to your 1st withdrawal |
0.70% prior to your 1st withdrawal |
| 1.05% after your 1st withdrawal |
1.10% after your 1st withdrawal |
As a reminder, you also have the option to cancel your MarketLock or MarketLock for Two Living Benefit on your tenth contract anniversary, or any contract anniversary thereafter. If you elect to cancel your
Living Benefit, you will no longer receive the guarantees of the MarketLock or MarketLock for Two Living Benefit and you will no longer be charged the fee.
Death Benefits
You must elect one of the death benefit options at the time you purchase your contract. Some options
are available for an additional fee, as described later in this section. Once elected,
you cannot change your death benefit option. You should discuss the available options with your financial representative to determine which option is best for you.
Certain death benefit options are either no longer offered or have changed since first being offered.
We do not pay a death benefit if:
•
your contract value is reduced to zero; or
•
you die after you begin the Income Phase. Your Beneficiary would receive any remaining guaranteed annuity income payments in accordance with the
annuity income option you selected. Please see ANNUITY INCOME OPTIONS.
We pay a death
benefit to your Beneficiary(ies) if you die during the Accumulation Phase. The death benefit will become payable upon death of the following individual.
| Owner |
Payable Upon Death of |
| Natural persons |
Owner (or first to die,
if jointly owned) |
| Non-natural person
(e.g. Trust) |
Annuitant |
Beneficiary Designation
You must notify us in writing of the Beneficiary(ies) who will receive any death benefit payments under your contract. You may change the Beneficiary at any
time, unless otherwise specified below.
•
If your contract is jointly owned, the surviving joint Owner must be the sole primary Beneficiary. Any other individual you designate as Beneficiary will
be the contingent Beneficiary.
•
If the Owner is a non-natural person then joint Annuitants, if any, shall be each other’s sole
primary Beneficiary, except when the Owner is a charitable remainder trust.
•
If the Owner is a trust, whether as an agent for a natural person or otherwise, you should consult with your tax and/or legal adviser to determine
whether this contract is an appropriate trust investment.
Death Benefit Processing
We process death benefit requests when we receive all required documentation, including satisfactory
proof of death, in Good Order, at the Annuity Service
Center.
| Satisfactory proof of death includes, but may not be limited to: |
| (1)A certified copy of the death certificate; or |
| (2)A certified copy of a decree of a court of competent jurisdiction as to the finding of death; or |
| (3)A written statement by a medical doctor who attended the deceased at the time of death. |
When Death Benefits are Calculated
•
All death benefit calculations are made as of the day required documentation is received in Good Order at the Annuity Service Center before Market
Close. If the death benefit request is received after Market Close, the death benefit
calculation will be made as of the next NYSE business day.
The contract value will remain invested pursuant to the Owner's
latest allocation instructions on file subject to the limitations described in this prospectus, until we receive notification of death and/or death claim paperwork in Good Order. Thereafter, a Beneficiary may
elect one of the death settlement options by contacting the Annuity Service Center.
If we receive notification of the Owner’s death before any previously requested transaction is
completed (including
44
systematic transfer
and withdrawal programs), we will cancel the previously requested transaction.
For contracts in which the aggregate of all Purchase Payments in contracts issued by AGL, US Life and/or
VALIC to the same Owner/Annuitant are in excess of the Purchase Payments Limit, we reserve the right to limit the death benefit amount that is in excess of
contract value at the time we receive all paperwork and satisfactory proof of death.
Any limit on the maximum death benefit payable would be mutually agreed upon in writing by you and the Company prior to purchasing the contract.
Effective January 15, 2016, if you have elected a Living Benefit feature, we will not accept
subsequent Purchase Payments on or after the 5th contract anniversary from your
contract issue date.
Death Benefit Settlement
Options
Your Beneficiary must elect one of the following settlement options after providing required
documentation, including satisfactory proof of death, in Good
Order.
•
Lump sum payment; or
•
Annuity Income Option; or
•
Continue the contract as the spousal Beneficiary, or under a Beneficiary continuation option; or
•
Payment option that is mutually agreeable between you and us
In general, the death benefit must be paid within 5 years of the
date of death unless the Beneficiary elects to have it payable in the form of an annuity income option. If the Beneficiary elects an annuity income option, it must be paid over the Beneficiary’s life
expectancy or a shorter period. Payments associated with such election must begin within
one year of death. Federal tax law may limit the Beneficiary’s death benefit and
payout options available after your death. Please see ANNUITY INCOME
OPTIONS.
Beneficiary Continuation Programs
Please consult a tax adviser regarding
tax implications about your particular circumstances if you are considering a Beneficiary Continuation option.
Extended Legacy Program
The Beneficiary to an existing contract issued by the Company may elect the Extended Legacy Program.
The program may not be elected in conjunction with any other settlement option.
Upon election of the Extended Legacy Program:
•
The contract continues in Owner’s name for the benefit of the Beneficiary who elected the Extended Legacy Program.
•
The Beneficiary may withdraw all or a portion of the contract value at any time and withdrawals are
not subject to withdrawal charges.
•
The Beneficiary may choose to participate in the Systematic Withdrawal Program and the Automatic
Asset Rebalancing Program.
Upon election of
the Extended Legacy Program, the beneficiary may choose to receive the death benefit under (1) a 5-year settlement option or (2) in the form of withdrawals for a longer period of time:
Under the 5-year settlement option, the Beneficiary may take withdrawals as desired, but the death
benefit proceeds must be distributed no later than five years from the date of death of
the Owner of the contract.
Note: If an IRA Owner died prior to January 1, 2020, the 5-year settlement option is not
available if the date of the Owner's death occurred after the required beginning date
for distributions.
If the beneficiary elects to take the death benefit in the form of withdrawals over a longer period of time:
•
Generally, IRS required minimum distributions must be made at least annually over a period not to exceed the Beneficiary’s life expectancy as
determined in the calendar year after the Owner’s death, with the flexibility to
withdraw more than the IRS required minimum distribution.
•
Payments must begin no later than the first anniversary of death for Non-Qualified contracts or
December 31 of the year following the year of death for IRAs.
Note: for IRAs, if the Owner’s death occurred on or after
January 1, 2020, choosing to receive the death benefit in the form of withdrawals for a
longer period of time is only available for a Spousal Beneficiary or a Non-Spousal
Beneficiary who is less than 10 years younger than the IRA Owner. Other Non-Spousal
Beneficiaries may instead elect the 5-year settlement option, if available.
If the contract value is less than the death benefit amount as of the date we receive satisfactory
proof of death and all required documentation in Good Order, we will increase the
contract value by the amount which the death benefit exceed contract value.
| We will process an Extended Legacy election as of the date we receive the following in Good Order at the Annuity Service Center: |
| •Death Claim form electing Extended Legacy Program;
and |
| •Satisfactory proof of death of the original Owner. |
Upon the Beneficiary’s request to our Annuity Service Center, we will provide a prospectus and Extended Legacy Guide, with important information including
expenses, investment options and administrative features. The
45
prospectus that the
Beneficiary will receive may be for a different product than the original Owner purchased.
The Extended Legacy Guide includes important information regarding the program offered to
Beneficiaries on or after September 20, 2010.
Restrictions on Extended Legacy Program
•
The Extended Legacy Program cannot be elected with rollover contracts from other companies.
•
No Purchase Payments are permitted.
•
Living Benefits and death benefits that may have been elected by the original Owner are not available and any charges associated with these features will no longer be deducted.
•
In the event of the Beneficiary’s death, any remaining contract value will be paid to the person(s) named by the Beneficiary.
•
The contract may not be assigned and ownership may not be changed or jointly owned.
•
Any Fixed Accounts
that may have been available to the original Owner will no longer be available for
investment.
Expenses
We will charge the Beneficiary an annual Base Contract Expense of 1.15%. This charge is deducted daily from the average daily ending net asset value
allocated to the Variable Portfolios.
Beneficiaries that elected the Extended Legacy Program prior to September 20, 2010 will continue to be charged the same Base Contract Expense as described
below under BASE CONTRACT EXPENSES.
Investment Options
•
The Beneficiary may transfer funds among the available Variable Portfolios;
•
Variable Portfolios may differ from those available to the original Owner;
•
Variable Portfolios may be of a different share class subject to higher 12b-1 fees; and
•
Beneficiaries that elected the Extended Legacy Program prior to September 20, 2010 will continue
to be offered the same Variable Portfolios as the original Owner.
Death Benefit Defined Terms
The term “Net Purchase Payment” is used
frequently in describing the death benefit payable. Net Purchase Payment is an on-going
calculation. It does not represent a contract value.
We determine Net Purchase Payments as Purchase Payments less adjustments for withdrawals. Net Purchase Payments are increased by the amount of
subsequent Purchase Payments, if any, and reduced for withdrawals, if
any, in the same
proportion that the contract value was reduced on the date of such withdrawal.
The term “Withdrawal Adjustment” is used, if you have elected a Living Benefit, to
describe the way in which the amount of the death benefit will be adjusted for withdrawals depending on when you take a withdrawal and the amount of the withdrawal. If cumulative withdrawals
for the current contract year are taken prior to your 81st birthday and are less than or equal to the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, the amount of adjustment will equal the
amount of each withdrawal. If a withdrawal is taken prior to your 81st birthday and cumulative withdrawals for the current contract year are in excess of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, the contract value and the death benefit are first reduced by the Maximum Annual
Withdrawal Amount. The resulting death benefit is further adjusted by the withdrawal
amount in excess of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount by the percentage by which the
Excess Withdrawal reduced the resulting contract value. If a withdrawal is taken on or after your 81st birthday , the amount of adjustment is determined by the percentage by which the withdrawal reduced the contract value.
The term “withdrawals” as used in describing the death benefit options is defined as withdrawals and the fees and charges applicable to those
withdrawals.
The Company does not accept Purchase
Payments from anyone age 86 or older. Therefore, the death benefit calculations assume
that no Purchase Payments are received on or after your 86th birthday. We will not accept
subsequent Purchase Payments on or after the fifth contract anniversary if you have
elected a Living Benefit feature.
The standard death
benefit and the optional Maximum Anniversary Value death benefit are calculated differently depending on whether you have also elected one of the Living Benefits described above.
Standard Death Benefit
The following is a description of the standard death benefit for contracts issued between August 2, 2004 and December 28, 2006.
If the contract is issued prior to your 83rd birthday, the standard death benefit on your contract is the greater of:
1.
Contract value; or
2.
Net Purchase Payments.
If the contract is issued on or after the 83rd birthday but prior
to your 86th birthday, the standard death benefit on your contract is the greater of:
1.
Contract value; or
2.
The lesser of:
a.
Net Purchase Payments; or
b.
125% of Contract value.
46
The following is a description of the standard death benefit for contracts issued between October 16, 2000 and August 1, 2004.
The standard death benefit on your contract, if you are age 74 or younger at the time of death, is the greater of:
1.
Contract value.
2.
Net Purchase Payments compounded at a 3% annual growth rate from the date of issue until the date of death, plus any Purchase Payments recorded
after the date of death; and reduced for any withdrawals (and fees and charges
applicable to those withdrawals) recorded after the date of death, in the same
proportion that the withdrawal reduced the contract value on the date of the withdrawal; or
If you are age 75 or older at the time of death, the death
benefit is the greater of:
1.
Contract value.
2.
Net Purchase Payments compounded at a 3% annual growth rate from date of issue until the your 75th birthday, plus any Purchase Payments recorded
after the 75th birthday; and reduced for any withdrawals (and fees and charges
applicable to those withdrawals) recorded after the 75th birthday, in the same
proportion that the withdrawal reduced the contract value on the date of the withdrawal.
Please see APPENDIX F – DEATH BENEFIT EXAMPLES for examples of how your death benefit is
calculated.
Optional Maximum Anniversary Value Death Benefit
The following is a description of the
Maximum Anniversary Value death benefit option for contracts issued between August 2, 2004 and December 28, 2006.
The death benefit is the greatest of:
1.
Contract value; or
2.
Net Purchase Payments; or
3.
Maximum anniversary value on any contract anniversary prior to your 83rd birthday. The Anniversary value equals the contract value on a
contract anniversary, reduced for withdrawals since that contract anniversary in the
same proportion that the contract value was reduced on the date of such withdrawal, and
adjusted for any Net Purchase Payments since that anniversary
The Maximum Anniversary Value option can only be elected prior to
your 83rd birthday.
Under the Maximum Anniversary Value option, if you die on or after your 90th birthday, the death
benefit is equal to your contract value. Accordingly, you will not get any benefit from
this option if you are age 90 or older at the time of death.
The following is a description of the Maximum Anniversary Value death benefit option for contracts issued prior to August 2, 2004.
The death benefit is the greatest of:
1.
Contract value; or
2.
Net Purchase Payments; or
3.
Maximum anniversary value on any contract anniversary prior to your 81st birthday. The anniversary value equals the contract value on a
contract anniversary increased by any Purchase Payments recorded after that
anniversary; and reduced for any withdrawals recorded after the anniversary, in the
same proportion that the withdrawal reduced the contract value on the date of the
withdrawal.
If you are age 90 or older at the time of death and you had selected the Maximum Anniversary Value death benefit option, the death benefit will be equal to your
contract value. Therefore, your Beneficiary will not receive any benefit from the
Maximum Anniversary Value death benefit option.
Please see APPENDIX F – DEATH BENEFIT
EXAMPLES for examples of how your death benefit is
calculated.
Optional Purchase Payment Accumulation
Death Benefit
The following is a
description of the Purchase Payment Accumulation death benefit option for contracts issued between August 2, 2004 and December 28, 2006.
If the contract is issued prior to your 75th birthday,
the death benefit is the greatest of:
1.
Contract value; or
2.
Net Purchase Payments, compounded at 3% annual growth rate to the earlier of the 75th birthday or the date of death, reduced for withdrawals after
the 75th birthday in the same proportion that the contract value was reduced on the
date of such withdrawal, and adjusted for Net Purchase Payments received after the 75th
birthday; or
3.
Contract value on the seventh contract anniversary, reduced for withdrawals since the seventh contract anniversary in the same proportion that the
contract value was reduced on the date of such withdrawal, and adjusted for Net
Purchase Payments received after the seventh contract anniversary.
The Purchase Payment Accumulation Option can only be elected
prior to your 75th birthday.
The following is a description of the 5% Accumulation death benefit option for contracts issued prior to August 2, 2004.
47
The death benefit
is the greater of:
1.
Contract value; or
2.
Net Purchase Payments compounded to the earlier of the 80th birthday or the date of death, at a 5% annual growth rate, plus any Purchase Payments
recorded after the 80th birthday or the date of death; and reduced for any withdrawals
(and fees and charges applicable to those withdrawals recorded after the 80th birthday
or the date of death, in the same proportion that the withdrawal reduced the contract
value on the date of the withdrawal, up to a maximum benefit of two times the Net
Purchase Payments made over the life of your contract.
If you die after the Latest Annuity Date and you selected the 5%
Accumulation option, any death benefit payable under the contract will be the Standard Death Benefit as described above. Therefore, your Beneficiary will not receive any benefit from the 5% Accumulation
death benefit option.
Optional EstatePlus Benefit
EstatePlus (“Earnings Advantage” for
contracts issued prior to August 2, 2004), an optional earnings enhancement death
benefit, may increase the death benefit amount if you have earnings in your contract at the time of death. The fee for the benefit is 0.25% of the average daily ending net asset value allocated to the Variable
Portfolios. EstatePlus is not available if you were age 81 or older at the time we
issued your contract.
If you purchased your contract prior to August 2, 2004, you were not charged a fee for the Earnings Advantage benefit. It was included in the Seasons Estate
Advantage which offered you a choice between the Maximum Anniversary Value or 5%
Accumulation death benefit options for a fee of 0.25% of the average daily ending net asset value allocated to the Variable Portfolios.
Please see APPENDIX F – DEATH BENEFIT
EXAMPLES for examples of how your death benefit is
calculated.
In order to elect EstatePlus, you must have also elected the optional Maximum Anniversary Value
death benefit described above.
You must elect EstatePlus at the time we issued your contract and you may not terminate this
election. Furthermore, EstatePlus is not payable after the Latest Annuity Date. You may
pay for EstatePlus and your Beneficiary may never receive the benefit if you live past
the Latest Annuity Date.
We will add a percentage of your contract earnings (the “EstatePlus Percentage” or “Earnings Advantage Percentage” for contracts
issued prior to August 2, 2004), subject to a maximum dollar amount (the “Maximum
EstatePlus Benefit” or “Maximum Earnings Advantage Percentage” for
contracts issued prior to August 2, 2004),
to the death benefit payable. The contract year of your death will determine the EstatePlus
Percentage and the Maximum EstatePlus Benefit.
The table below applies to contracts issued prior to your 70th birthday:
| Contract Year
of Death |
EstatePlus
Percentage |
Maximum
EstatePlus Benefit |
| Years 0 – 4 |
25% of Earnings |
40% of Net Purchase
Payments* (25% for
contracts issued prior
to 8/2/04) |
| Years 5 – 9 |
40% of Earnings |
65% of Net Purchase
Payments* (40% for
contracts issued prior
to 8/2/04) |
| Years 10+ |
50% of Earnings |
75% of Net Purchase Payments* (50% for contracts issued prior to 8/2/04) |
The table below applies to contracts issued on or after your 70th birthday but prior to your 81st
birthday:
| Contract Year
of Death |
EstatePlus
Percentage |
Maximum
EstatePlus Benefit |
| All Contract
Years |
25% of Earnings |
40% of Net Purchase Payments* |
*
Purchase Payments received after the 5th contract anniversary must remain in the contract for at least 6 full months to be included as part of Net Purchase Payments for
the purpose of the Maximum EstatePlus Benefit.
What is the Contract Year of Death?
Contract Year of Death is the number of full 12-month periods during which you have owned your
contract ending on the date of death. Your Contract Year of Death is used to determine
the EstatePlus Percentage and Maximum EstatePlus Benefit as indicated in the table above.
What is the EstatePlus Percentage?
We determine the EstatePlus benefit using the EstatePlus Percentage, indicated in the table above,
which is a specified percentage of the earnings in your contract on the date of death.
For the purpose of this calculation, earnings equals contract value minus Net Purchase Payments as of the date of death. If there are no earnings in your contract at the time of death, the amount of your
EstatePlus benefit will be zero.
What is the Maximum EstatePlus Benefit?
The EstatePlus benefit is subject to a maximum dollar amount. The Maximum EstatePlus Benefit is equal to a specified percentage of your Net Purchase
Payments, as indicated in the table above.
EstatePlus may not be available in your state or through the broker-dealer with which your financial
representative is affiliated.
A Continuing Spouse may continue EstatePlus if they are age 80 or younger on the Continuation Date
or terminate
48
the benefit. If a
Continuing Spouse is age 81 or older on the Continuation Date, they may continue the contract only and may not continue the EstatePlus feature. If the Continuing Spouse terminates EstatePlus or dies
after the Latest Annuity Date, no EstatePlus benefit will be payable to the Continuing
Spouse’s Beneficiary. Please see SPOUSAL
CONTINUATION below.
We reserve the right to modify, suspend or terminate EstatePlus (in its entirety or any component) at any time for
prospectively issued contracts.
Spousal Continuation
The Continuing Spouse may elect to continue the contract after your death. A spousal continuation
can only take place once, upon the death of the original Owner of the contract.
Upon election of Spousal Continuation:
•
Generally, the contract, its benefits and elected features, if any, remain the same.
•
Continuing Spouse is subject to the same fees, charges and expenses applicable to the original
Owner of the contract. Please see EXPENSES.
•
Continuing Spouse may not terminate the Optional Maximum Anniversary Value or Purchase Payment Accumulation death benefit if elected at contract issue.
•
Continuing Spouse will be subject to the investment risk of Variable Portfolios, as was the original Owner.
Non-spousal joint Owners (including Domestic Partners) are not
eligible for spousal continuation, under current tax law.
Upon a spousal continuation, we will contribute to the contract
value an amount by which the death benefit that would have been paid to the Beneficiary upon the death of the original Owner, exceeds the contract value as of the Good Order date (“Continuation
Contribution”), if any. The Continuation Contribution is not considered a Purchase
Payment for the purposes of any other calculations except the death benefit following
the Continuing Spouse’s death.
| We will process a spousal continuation as of the date we receive the following at the Annuity Service Center: |
| •Death Claim form;
and |
| •Satisfactory proof of death of the original Owner. |
We will add any Continuation Contribution as of the date we receive both the Continuing Spouse’s written request to continue the contract and satisfactory
proof of death of the original Owner (“Continuation Date”) at the Annuity
Service Center.
The age of the Continuing Spouse on the Continuation Date will be used to determine any future death benefits under the contract. Please see APPENDIX B - DEATH
BENEFIT FOLLOWING SPOUSAL CONTINUATION for a discussion of the death benefit calculations upon a
Continuing Spouse’s death.
We reserve the right to modify, suspend or terminate the Spousal
Continuation provision (in its entirety or any component) at any time for prospectively issued contracts.
Please see OPTIONAL LIVING BENEFITS above for information on the effect of Spousal Continuation on
these benefits.
Expenses
We may deduct the following fees and expenses if applicable from your contract, as described later
in this section.
•
Base Contract Expenses
•
Withdrawal Charges
•
Underlying Fund Expenses
•
Contract Maintenance Fee
•
Transfer Fee
•
Optional Living Benefit Fee
•
Optional Death Benefit Fee
Fees and expenses
associated with your contract reduce your investment return. Before purchasing this contract, you should consider the effect of fees and expenses on your investment. You should fully discuss this
decision with your financial representative. We will not increase certain contract
fees, such as the Base Contract Expense or withdrawal charges for the life of your contract. Underlying Fund investment management fees may increase or decrease. Some states may require that we charge
less than the amounts described below. Please see APPENDIX C — STATE CONTRACT AVAILABILITY AND/OR VARIABILITY for state-specific expenses.
We intend to profit from the sale of the contracts. Our profit may be derived as a result of a variety of pricing factors including but not limited to the fees and
charges assessed under the contract and/or amounts we may receive from an Underlying
Fund, its investment advisor and/or subadvisors (or affiliates thereof).
Please see PAYMENTS IN CONNECTION WITH DISTRIBUTION
OF THE CONTRACT below. The fees, charges, amounts received from the Underlying Funds (or affiliates thereof) and any resulting profit may be used for any
corporate purpose including supporting marketing, distribution and/or administration of
the contract and, in its role as an intermediary, the Underlying
Funds.
49
| Base Contract Expenses |
1.40% |
(annualized charge as a percentage of the average daily ending
net asset value allocated to Variable Portfolios)
The Base Contract Expense (also referred to as Separate Account
Charge) compensates the Company for the mortality and expense risk and the costs of contract distribution assumed by the Company.
Generally, the mortality risks assumed by the Company arise from its contractual obligations to make annuity income payments after the Annuity Date and to
provide a death benefit. The expense risk assumed by the Company is that the costs of
administering the contracts and the Separate Account will exceed the amount received from the fees and charges assessed under the contract. There may not necessarily be a relationship between the
administrative charge imposed under the contract and the amount of expenses that may be
attributable to the contract.
If these charges do not cover all of our expenses, we will pay
the difference. Likewise, if these charges exceed our expenses, we will keep the difference. The mortality and expense risk charge is expected to result in a profit. Profit may be used for any cost or expense
including supporting distribution. Please see PAYMENTS IN CONNECTION
WITH DISTRIBUTION OF THE CONTRACT below.
If your Beneficiary elects to take the death benefit amount under
the Extended Legacy Program, we will deduct an annual Base Contract Expense of
1.15% of the average daily ending net asset value allocated to the Variable Portfolios. Please see Extended Legacy Program under DEATH BENEFITS.
Withdrawal Charges
The contract provides a penalty-free withdrawal amount every contract year. Please see ACCESS TO YOUR MONEY above. You may incur a withdrawal charge if you take a withdrawal in excess of the penalty-free
withdrawal amount and/or if you fully surrender your contract. Withdrawal Charges
reimburse us for the cost of contract sales, expenses associated with issuing your contract and other acquisition expenses.
We apply a withdrawal charge schedule against each Purchase Payment you contribute to the contract.
After a Purchase Payment has been in the contract for 9 complete years if you elected
to participate in the Seasons Rewards program, a withdrawal charge no longer applies to that Purchase Payment. The withdrawal charge
percentage declines over time for each Purchase Payment in the contract. The withdrawal
charge schedules are as follows:
Withdrawal
Charge without the election of the Seasons Rewards Program:
| Years Since Purchase Payment Receipt |
1 |
2 |
3 |
4 |
5 |
6 |
7 |
8+ |
| Withdrawal Charge |
7% |
6% |
6% |
5% |
4% |
3% |
2% |
0% |
Withdrawal Charge with election of the Seasons Rewards Program:
| Years Since Purchase
Payment Receipt |
1 |
2 |
3 |
4 |
5 |
6 |
7 |
8 |
9 |
10+ |
| Withdrawal Charge |
9% |
8% |
7% |
6% |
6% |
5% |
4% |
3% |
2% |
0% |
These higher potential withdrawal charges for the Seasons Rewards
program may compensate us for the expenses associated with the program.
The Seasons Rewards
program is designed for long term investing. We expect that if you remain committed to this investment over the long term, we will profit as a result of fees charged over the life of your
contract. However, other than the withdrawal charge, no other fees or charges are
higher if you elect Seasons Rewards than the contract without an election of this program.
If you participate in the Seasons Rewards program, you will not receive any deferred Payment Enhancement if you fully withdraw a Purchase Payment or if you
surrender your contract prior to the corresponding Deferred Payment Enhancement
Date.
Although we do not assess a withdrawal charge when you take a 10% free withdrawal of the total
invested amount we will proportionally reduce the amount of any corresponding Deferred
Payment Enhancement.
When calculating the withdrawal
charge, we treat withdrawals as coming first from the Purchase Payments that have been in your contract the longest, which means the Purchase Payments that have the lowest Withdrawal Charge percentages. However, for tax purposes,
per IRS requirements, your withdrawals are considered as coming first from taxable
earnings, then from Purchase Payments, which are not taxable if your contract is Non-Qualified. Please see ACCESS TO YOUR
MONEY above.
If you take a partial withdrawal, you can choose whether any applicable withdrawal charges are
deducted from the amount withdrawn or from the contract value remaining after the
amount withdrawn. If you fully surrender your contract value, we deduct any applicable withdrawal charges from the amount surrendered.
We will not assess a withdrawal charge when we pay a death benefit or when you annuitize your contract.
Withdrawals made prior to age 59½ may result in tax penalties. Please see TAXES below.
Underlying Fund Expenses
There are deductions from and expenses paid out of the assets of each Underlying Fund. Detailed information about these deductions and expenses can be
found in the prospectuses for the Underlying
Funds.
Investment Management Fees
Investment management fees are set by the Underlying Funds’ own board of directors, and may vary. These fees are not fixed or specified in your
annuity contract.
50
Each Variable
Portfolio purchases shares of a corresponding Underlying Fund. The Accumulation Unit value for each purchased Variable Portfolio share reflects the investment management fees and other expenses of the
corresponding Underlying Funds. If you invest in a Master Fund, the Accumulation Unit
value will also reflect the investment management fee and other expenses of the corresponding Master Fund.
12b-1 Fees
Underlying Fund shares are subject to a fee of 0.25% imposed under a servicing plan adopted by Seasons Series Trust, SunAmerica Series Trust,
Fidelity® Variable Insurance Products, T. Rowe Price Equity Series, Inc. and Class Service Shares of Goldman Sachs
Variable Insurance Trust pursuant to Rule 12b-1 under the Investment Company Act of
1940. The Managed Allocation Portfolios do not directly impose a 12b-1 fee, but do invest in certain Underlying Funds, and thus, indirectly bear the expenses of those Underlying Funds including the
12b-1 fees.
The 12b-1 fees compensate us for costs
associated with the servicing of these shares, including, but not limited to,
reimbursing us for expenditures we make to registered representatives in selling firms
for providing services to contract Owners who are indirect beneficial Owners of these
shares and for maintaining contract Owner accounts.
There are deductions from and expenses paid out of the assets of
each Underlying Fund. Detailed information about
these deductions and expenses can be found in the prospectuses for the Underlying Funds.
Contract Maintenance Fee
During the Accumulation Phase, we deduct a contract maintenance fee of $35 from your contract once per year on your contract anniversary. This charge compensates us for the cost of administering your contract.
The fee is deducted proportionately from your contract value on your contract
anniversary by redeeming the number of Accumulation Units invested in the Variable
Portfolios and the dollar amount invested in available Fixed Accounts which in total
equal the amount of the fee. If you withdraw your entire contract value, we will deduct
the contract maintenance fee from that withdrawal.
If your contract value is $50,000 or more on your contract anniversary date, we currently waive this fee. This waiver is subject to change without
notice.
Please see APPENDIX C — STATE CONTRACT AVAILABILITY AND/OR VARIABILITY for the
state-specific Contract Maintenance Fee.
Transfer Fee
| After 15 Transfers |
$25 |
We permit 15 free transfers between investment options each contract year. We charge you $25 for each additional transfer that contract year. The transfer fee compensates us
for the cost of processing your transfer.
In Pennsylvania and Texas, any transfer over the limit of 15 will incur a $10 transfer fee.
In Pennsylvania and Texas, any transfer over the limit of 15 will incur a $10 transfer fee.
Optional Living
Benefits Fees
Please see FEE TABLE above for a description of the optional Living Benefit fees offered over time in this contract.
Optional Enhanced Death Benefit Fee
The annualized fee for the optional death benefit is
0.15% of the average daily ending net asset value allocated to the Variable
Portfolio(s). This enhanced death benefit fee applies to the Maximum Anniversary Value death benefit option or Purchase Payment Accumulation death benefit option issued to contracts on or after August
2, 2004.
If you purchased your contract prior to August 2, 2004, the enhanced death benefit option on your
contracts was called Seasons Estate Advantage. Seasons Estate Advantage offered the
choice between the Maximum Anniversary Value of 5% Accumulation death benefit options along with the Earnings Advantage death benefit for a fee of 0.25% of the average daily ending net asset value
allocated to the Variable Portfolios.
Optional EstatePlus Fee
The annualized fee for the optional EstatePlus benefit is 0.25% of the average daily ending net asset value allocated to the Variable Portfolio(s). There is no fee applicable for this benefit (“Earnings Advantage”) for contracts issued prior to August 2,
2004.
Premium
Tax
Certain states charge the Company a tax on Purchase Payments that ranges from 0% to 3.5%. Some
states assess this premium tax when the contract is issued while other states only
assess the tax upon annuitization. The Company may advance any tax amount due, but we will deduct such amount from your contract value only when and if you begin the Income Phase
(annuitization).
Income Taxes
We do not currently deduct income taxes from your contract. We reserve the right to do so in the
future.
Reduction or
Elimination of Fees, Expenses and Additional Amounts Credited
Sometimes sales of contracts to groups of similarly situated individuals may lower our fees and
expenses. We determine which groups are eligible for this treatment. Some of the
criteria we evaluate to make a determination are size of the group; amount of expected
Purchase Payments; relationship existing between us and the prospective purchaser; length of time a group of contracts is expected to remain active; purpose of the purchase and whether that
purpose increases
51
the likelihood that
our expenses will be reduced; and/or any other factors that we believe indicate that fees and expenses may be reduced.
The Company may make such a determination regarding sales to its employees, its affiliates’ employees and employees of currently contracted
broker-dealers; its registered representatives; and immediate family members of all of
those described. Currently, the Company credits an additional amount to contracts sold to the following groups: (1) employees of the Company and its affiliates, and their immediate family members; (2) appointed
agents and registered representatives of broker-dealers that sell the Company’s
and its affiliates’ variable contracts, and the agents’ and registered representatives’ immediate family members; (3) trustees of mutual funds offered in the Company’s and its affiliates’
variable contracts. The additional amount credited to a contract sold to one of the
above individuals will generally equal the commission payable on the initial purchase
payment for the contract. This means that the additional amount will generally be 6.00%
(4.00% if you elected Seasons Rewards) of the initial Purchase Payment.
Certain broker-dealers may limit crediting this additional amount to employees only.
Payments in connection with distribution of the contract
Payments We Make
We make payments in connection with the distribution of the contracts that generally fall into the three categories below.
As a result of the payments that financial representatives may receive from us or other companies,
some financial representatives may have a financial incentive to offer you a new
contract in place of the one you already own. You should consider exchanging a contract you already own only if you determine, after comparing the features, fees, and risks of both contracts, that it is better
for you to purchase the new contract rather than continue to own your existing
contract.
Commissions. Registered representatives of affiliated and unaffiliated broker-dealers (“selling
firms”) licensed under federal securities laws and state insurance laws sell the
contract to the public. The selling firms have entered into written selling agreements
with the Company and Corebridge Capital Services, Inc., the distributor of the
contracts. We pay commissions to the selling firms for the sale of your contract. The
selling firms are paid commissions for the promotion and sale of the contracts according to one or more schedules. The amount and timing of commissions will vary depending on the selling firm and
its selling agreement with us. For example, as one option, we may pay upfront
commission only, up to a maximum 7.75% of each
Purchase Payment you invest (which may include promotional amounts we may pay periodically as commission
specials). Another option may be a lower upfront commission on each Purchase Payment, with a trail commission of up to a maximum 1.50% of contract value annually for the life of the contract.
The registered representative who sells you the contract typically receives a portion of the
compensation we pay to his/her selling firm, depending on the agreement between the
selling firms and its registered representative and their internal compensation program. We are not involved in determining your registered representatives’ compensation.
Additional Cash Compensation. We may enter into agreements to pay selling firms support fees in the form of additional cash compensation (“revenue sharing”). These revenue sharing payments may be
intended to reimburse the selling firms for specific expenses incurred or may be based
on sales, certain assets under management, longevity of assets invested with us and/or
a flat fee. Asset-based payments primarily create incentives to service and maintain
previously sold contracts. Sales-based payments primarily create incentives to make new
sales of contracts.
These revenue sharing payments may be consideration for, among other things, product
placement/preference and visibility, greater access to train and educate the selling
firm’s registered representatives about our contracts, our participation in sales
conferences and educational seminars and for selling firms to perform due diligence on our contracts. The amount of these fees may be tied to the anticipated level of our access in that
selling firm.
We enter into such revenue sharing arrangements in our discretion and we may negotiate customized
arrangements with selling firms, including affiliated and non-affiliated selling firms
based on various factors. These special compensation arrangements are not offered to all selling firms and the terms of such arrangements may vary between selling firms depending on, among other
things, the level and type of marketing and distribution support provided, assets under
management and the volume and size of the sales of our contracts.
If allowed by his or her selling firm, a registered
representative or other eligible person may purchase a contract on a basis in which an
additional amount is credited to the contract. Please see REDUCTION OR
ELIMINATION OF FEES, EXPENSES AND ADDITIONAL AMOUNTS
CREDITED above.
We provide a list of firms to whom we paid annual amounts greater than $15,000 under these revenue sharing arrangements in
2025 in the Statement of Additional Information which is available upon request.
Non-Cash Compensation. Some registered representatives and their supervisors may receive various types of non-cash compensation such as gifts, promotional items and entertainment in connection with our marketing
efforts. We may also pay for registered representatives to attend
52
educational and/or
business seminars. Any such compensation is paid in accordance with SEC and FINRA
rules.
We do not assess a specific charge directly to you or your Separate Account assets in order to cover commissions and other sales expenses and incentives we
pay. However, we anticipate recovering these amounts from our profits which are derived
from the fees and charges collected under the contract. We hope to benefit from these revenue sharing arrangements through increased sales of our contracts and greater customer service support.
Revenue sharing arrangements may provide selling firms and/or their registered representatives with an incentive to favor sales of our contracts over other
variable annuity contracts (or other investments) with respect to which a selling firm
does not receive the same level of additional compensation. You should
discuss with your selling firm and/or registered representative how they are compensated for sales of a contract and/or any resulting real or
perceived conflicts of interest. You may wish to take such revenue sharing arrangements into account when considering or evaluating any recommendation
relating to this contract.
Payments We
Receive
We and our affiliates may directly or indirectly receive revenue sharing payments from the Trusts,
their investment advisors, subadvisors and/or distributors (or affiliates thereof), in
connection with certain administrative, marketing and other services we provide and related expenses we incur. The availability of these revenue sharing arrangements creates an incentive for
us to seek and offer Underlying Funds (and classes of shares of such Underlying Funds)
that pay us higher amounts. Other Underlying Funds (or available classes of shares) may have lower fees and better overall investment performance. Not all Trusts pay the same amount of revenue sharing.
Therefore, the amount of fees we collect may be greater or smaller based on the
Underlying Funds you select.
We and our affiliates generally receive three kinds of payments described below.
Rule 12b-1 or Service Fees. We receive 12b-1 fees of up to 0.25% of the average daily net assets in certain Underlying Funds, including the Feeder Funds that are attributable to the contract and to certain
other variable insurance products that we and our affiliates issue. Rule 12b-1 fees and
service fees paid out of Underlying Fund assets will reduce the amount of assets that otherwise would be available for investment, and reduce the Underlying Fund’s investment return. The
dollar-amount of asset-based payments we receive from the Underlying Funds is not set
and will fluctuate over time depending on the Underlying Funds’ net asset value and the amount of assets invested.
Administrative, Marketing and Support Service Fees. We receive compensation of up to 0.70% annually based on assets under management from certain Trusts’ investment advisors, subadvisors and/or
distributors (or affiliates thereof). These payments may be derived, in whole or in
part, from the profits the investment advisor realizes on the investment management
fees deducted from assets of the Underlying Funds or wholly from the assets of the
Underlying Funds. Contract Owners, through their indirect investment in the Trusts,
bear the costs of these investment management fees, which in turn will reduce the return on your investment. The payments we receive are generally based on assets under management from certain
Trusts’ investment advisors or their affiliates and vary by Trust. Some
investment advisors, subadvisors and/or distributors (or affiliates thereof) pay us more than others. The amount may be significant.
Other Payments. Certain investment advisors, subadvisors and/or distributors (or affiliates thereof) may help
offset the costs we incur for marketing activities and training to support sales of the
Underlying Funds in the contract. These amounts are paid voluntarily and may provide such advisors, subadvisors and/or distributors access to national and regional sales conferences attended by our
employees and registered representatives. The amounts paid depend on the nature of the
meetings, the number of meetings attended, the costs expected to be incurred and the level of the advisor’s, subadvisor’s or distributor’s participation.
In addition, we (and our affiliates) may receive
occasional gifts, entertainment or other compensation as an incentive to market the
Underlying Funds and to cooperate with their marketing efforts. As a result of these payments, the investment advisors, subadvisors and/or distributors (or affiliates thereof) may benefit from
increased access to our wholesalers and to our affiliates involved in the distribution
of the contract.
Annuity Income Options
The Income Phase
What is the Income Phase?
During the Income Phase, we use the money accumulated in your contract to make regular payments to
you. This is known as “annuitizing” your contract. At this point, the
Accumulation Phase ends. You will no longer be able to take withdrawals of contract
value and all other features and benefits of your contract will terminate, including your
ability to surrender your contract.
Beginning the Income Phase is an important event. You
have different options available to you. You should
discuss your options with your financial
representative and/or tax adviser
so that together you may make the best decision for your particular circumstances.
53
When does the Income Phase begin?
Generally, you can annuitize your contract any time after your second contract anniversary
(“Annuity Date”) and on or before the Latest Annuity Date, defined below, by
completing and mailing the Annuity Option Selection Form to our Annuity Service
Center.
If you do not request to annuitize your contract
on the Annuity Date of your choice, your contract will be annuitized on the Latest
Annuity Date. Your Latest Annuity Date is defined as the later of the first NYSE business day of the month following your 95th birthday or 10 years after your contract issue date, whichever is
later. If your contract is jointly owned, the Latest Annuity Date is based on the older
Owner’s date of birth.
How do I elect to begin the Income Phase?
You must select one of the annuity income payment options, listed below, that best meets your needs
by mailing a completed Annuity Option Selection Form to our Annuity Service Center. If
you do not select an annuity income payment option, your contract will be annuitized in
accordance with the default annuity income payment option specified under Annuity Income Options below.
What is the impact on the living and death
benefits if I annuitize?
If you annuitize, you may choose to take annuity income payments or withdrawals under your Living
Benefit. Prior to annuitizing, you should seek advice on whether taking annuity income
payments under the contract or guaranteed withdrawals under a Living Benefit are more advantageous to you. Upon annuitizing the contract, the death benefit will terminate. If your contract value is
reduced to zero prior to annuitization as a result of receiving guaranteed withdrawals
under the Living Benefit, you will receive your Protected Income Payment under the Living Benefit. Please see OPTIONAL LIVING BENEFITS and DEATH BENEFITS above.
Annuity Income Options
You must send a written request to our Annuity Service Center to select an annuity income option. Once you begin receiving annuity income payments, you
cannot change your annuity income option. If you elect to receive annuity income
payments but do not select an annuity income option, your annuity income payments shall
be in accordance with Option 4 for a period of 10 years; for annuity income payments
based on joint lives, the default is Option 3 for a period of 10 years. Generally, the amount of each annuity income payment will be less with greater frequency of payments or if you chose a longer period
certain guarantee.
We base our calculation of annuity income payments on the life expectancy of the Annuitant and the
annuity rates set forth in your contract. In most contracts, the Owner and Annuitant
are the same person. The Owner may change the Annuitant if different from the Owner at any time prior to
the Annuity Date.
The Owner must notify us if the Annuitant dies before the Annuity Date and designate a
new Annuitant. If we do not receive a new Annuitant election, the Owner may not select
an annuity income option based on the life of the Annuitant.
If the contract is owned by a non-natural Owner, the Annuitant cannot be changed after the contract has been issued and the death of the Annuitant will
trigger the payment of the death benefit.
If you elect a lifetime based annuity income option without a guaranteed period, your annuity income payments depend on longevity only. That means that you may
potentially not live long enough to receive an annuity income payment. If you die
before the first annuity income payment, no annuity income payments will be made.
Annuity Income Option 1 – Life Income Annuity
This option provides annuity income payments for the life of the Annuitant. Annuity income payments
end when the Annuitant dies.
Annuity Income Option 2 – Joint and Survivor Life Income Annuity
This option provides annuity income payments for the life of the Annuitant and for the life of
another designated person. Upon the death of either person, we will continue to make
annuity income payments during the lifetime of the survivor. Annuity income payments
end when the survivor dies. For Qualified contracts, under certain circumstances, the
survivor’s annuity income payments may be limited based on the Internal Revenue
Code.
Annuity Income Option 3 – Joint and
Survivor Life Income Annuity with 10 or 20 Years Guaranteed
This option is similar to Option 2 above, with an additional guarantee of payments for at least 10
or 20 years, depending on the period chosen. If the Annuitant and the survivor die
before all of the guaranteed annuity income payments have been made, the remaining annuity income payments are made to the Beneficiary under your contract. A guarantee of payments greater than 10
years may not be available to all Beneficiaries. For Qualified contracts, under certain
circumstances the survivor's annuity income payments may be limited based on the Internal Revenue Code.
Annuity Income Option 4 – Life Income Annuity with 10 or 20 Years
Guaranteed
This option is similar to income Option 1 above with an additional guarantee of payments for at
least 10 or 20 years, depending on the period chosen. If the Annuitant dies before all
guaranteed annuity income payments are made, the remaining annuity income payments are made to the Beneficiary under your contract. A guarantee of payments greater than 10 years may not be
available to all Beneficiaries. For Qualified contracts, under certain
54
circumstances the
Beneficiary’s annuity income payments may be limited based on the Internal Revenue Code.
Annuity Income Option 5 – Income for a Specified
Period
This option provides annuity income payments for a guaranteed period ranging from 5 to 30 years,
depending on the period chosen. If the Annuitant dies before all the guaranteed annuity
income payments are made, the remaining annuity income payments are made to the
Beneficiary under your contract. A guarantee of payments for more than 10 years may not
be available to all Beneficiaries. For Qualified contracts, under certain circumstances
the Beneficiary’s annuity income payments may be limited based on the Internal Revenue Code. Additionally, if variable annuity income payments are elected under this option, you (or the
Beneficiary under the contract if the Annuitant dies prior to all guaranteed annuity income payments being made) may redeem any remaining guaranteed variable annuity income payments after the
Annuity Date. Upon your request, the contract may be commuted if a period certain
annuitization income option has been elected. The amount available upon such redemption
would be the discounted present value of any remaining guaranteed annuity income payments that would reflect the fluctuating trading costs for liquidating the securities in place to pay for these
contractual obligations. The detrimental impact depends on the nature of the securities
(and which may include short-term, medium term, and/or long-term investments) resulting in varying losses to the Company.
The value of an Annuity Unit, regardless of the option chosen, takes into account Base Contract
Expense which includes a mortality and expense risk charge. Since Option 5 does not
contain an element of mortality risk, no benefit is derived from this charge.
Please see the Statement of Additional Information for a more detailed discussion of the annuity
income options.
Fixed
or Variable Annuity Income Payments
You can choose annuity income payments that are fixed, variable
or both. Unless otherwise elected, if at the date when annuity income payments begin you are invested in the Variable Portfolios only, your annuity income payments will be variable and if your money is
only in Fixed Accounts at that time, your annuity income payments will be fixed in
amount. Further, if you are invested in both Fixed Accounts and Variable Portfolios
when annuity income payments begin, your payments will be fixed and variable, unless
otherwise elected. If annuity income payments are fixed, the Company guarantees the
amount of each payment. If the annuity income payments are variable, the amount is not
guaranteed and may fluctuate as described under ANNUITY INCOME
PAYMENTS below.
Annuity Income Payments
We make annuity income payments on a monthly, quarterly, semi-annual or annual basis as elected by
you. You instruct us to send you a check or to have the payments directly deposited
into your bank account. If state law allows, we distribute annuities with a contract value of $5,000 or less in a lump sum. Also, if state law allows and the selected annuity income option results in annuity
income payments of less than $50 per payment, we may decrease the frequency of
payments.
If you are invested in the Variable Portfolios
after the Annuity Date, your annuity income payments vary depending on the
following:
•
for life income options, your age when annuity income payments begin; and
•
the contract value attributable to the Variable Portfolios on the Annuity Date; and
•
the 3.5% assumed investment rate used in the annuity table for the contract; and
•
the performance of the Variable Portfolios in which you are invested during the time you receive
annuity income payments.
If you are invested in both the Fixed Accounts and the Variable Portfolios after the Annuity Date, the allocation of funds between the Fixed Accounts and
Variable Portfolios also impacts the amount of your annuity income payments.
The value of fixed annuity income payments, if elected, will not be less than 1%. The value of
variable annuity income payments, if elected, is based on an assumed interest rate
(“AIR”) of 3.5% compounded annually. Variable annuity income payments
generally increase or decrease from one annuity income payment date to the next based upon the performance of the applicable Variable Portfolios. If the performance of the Variable Portfolios
selected is equal to the AIR, the annuity income payments will remain constant. If
performance of Variable Portfolios is greater than the AIR, the annuity income payments will increase and if it is less than the AIR, the annuity income payments will decline.
Deferment of Payments
We may defer making fixed payments for up to six months, or less if required by law. Interest is
credited to you during the deferral period. Please see ACCESS TO YOUR
MONEY above for a discussion of when payments from a
Variable Portfolio may be suspended or postponed.
Taxes
The federal income
tax treatment of annuity contracts or retirement programs is complex and sometimes
uncertain. The discussion below is intended for general informational purposes only and
is not intended as tax advice, either general or individualized, nor should be interpreted as providing any
predictions or guarantees of a particular tax
55
treatment.
This discussion is based upon the Company’s understanding of current tax rules and interpretations. Finally, this discussion
does not address all federal income tax consequences of transactions (including consequences of sales to foreign individuals or entities), state or local tax consequences, estate or gift tax
consequences, or the impact of foreign tax laws, associated with your contract.
Tax laws are subject to legislative modification, and while many such modifications will have only a
prospective application, it is important to recognize that a change could have a
retroactive effect as well. As a result, you should consult a tax adviser about the application of tax rules found in the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (“IRC” or “the
Code”), Treasury Regulations,
applicable Internal Revenue Service (“IRS”) guidance,
and any regulatory developments to your individual situation. We do not guarantee the tax status or treatment of your annuity contract.
Tax rules vary, depending on
whether the contract is offered under your employer-sponsored retirement program or
arrangement, an individual retirement account or annuity
(a
Qualified contract), or a Non-Qualified
contract.
The contracts are used under many types of retirement arrangements, including the following:
•
IRC section 403(b) annuities for employees of public schools,
community colleges, colleges and universities, and other section 501(c)(3)
tax-exempt organizations;
•
IRC section 401(a), 403(a), and 401(k)
qualified plans (including plans
for
self-employed individuals);
•
IRC section 408(b) traditional IRAs;
•
IRC section 408A Roth IRAs;
•
IRC section 457 deferred compensation plans of governmental and certain tax-exempt employers;
•
IRC section 408(k) SEPs and SARSEPs; and
•
IRC section 408(p) SIMPLE retirement accounts.
Contracts purchased under these retirement arrangements described
above (“Qualified Arrangement”) generally are referred to in this prospectus as “Qualified contracts.” Contracts that are not purchased in connection with a Qualified Arrangement generally are referred to in this prospectus as “Non-Qualified contracts.”
Note that there are certain types of plans that are referred to as non-qualified, e.g. non-qualified
deferred compensation plans under IRC section 457, that, for purposes
of this prospectus, are considered Qualified Arrangements. See below for further details.
Non-Qualified Contracts
Tax Status of Non-Qualified Contracts
In General
Generally, the increases in the value of a contract are not taxed until a distribution occurs. The taxable portion of the distribution is taxed at ordinary income tax rates. However, this tax
deferral is only available if the contract satisfies certain federal tax rules and requirements, described next. We do not guarantee the tax status or treatment of your contract. The remainder of the discussion assumes that the contract will be treated as an annuity contract for federal income tax purposes.
Late Annuity Start Date
If the contract’s annuity start date occurs (or is scheduled to occur) at a time when the
Owner has reached an advanced age,
it is possible that the contract would not be treated as an annuity for federal income
tax purposes. In that event, the income and gains under the contract could be currently includable in the Owner’s income.
Diversification
For a contract to be treated as a variable annuity for federal income tax purposes, the underlying
investments under the variable annuity must be “adequately diversified”. Treasury Regulations provide standards that must be met to comply with the rules. Under the regulations, an
investment portfolio will be deemed adequately diversified if (1) no more than 55% of
the value of the total assets of the portfolio is represented by any one investment; (2) no more than 70% of the value of the total assets of the portfolio is represented by any two investments;
(3) no more than 80% of the value of the total assets of the portfolio is represented
by any three investments; and (4) no more than 90% of the value of the total assets of
the portfolio is represented by any four investments.
If the variable annuity fails to comply with these diversification standards, you could be required to pay tax currently on the excess of the contract
value over the contract Purchase Payments. We expect that the manager of the Underlying
Funds monitors the Underlying Funds to comply with these Treasury Regulations.
Investor Control
Under certain circumstances, you, and not the Company, could be treated as the owner of the assets held in the Separate Account under your Non-Qualified
contract, based on the degree of control you exercise over the underlying investments.
If this occurs, you may be currently taxed on income and gains attributable to the assets under the contract rather than at the time of withdrawal.
There is little guidance in this area, and the determination of whether you possess sufficient incidents of ownership over such assets depends on all of the
relevant facts and circumstances. However, Revenue Rulings 2003-91 and 2003-92 provide
that an annuity owner’s ability to choose
56
among
general investment strategies either at the time of the initial purchase or thereafter, does not constitute control sufficient to cause the contract holder to be treated as the owner of such assets. The Revenue
Rulings provide that if, based on all the facts and circumstances, you do not have
direct or indirect control over such assets, then you do not possess sufficient
incidents of ownership over the assets supporting the annuity to be deemed the owner of the assets for federal income tax purposes. We do not know what limits may be set by the IRS in any future
guidance that it may issue and whether such limits will apply to existing
contracts.
While we believe the contract does not give you investor control over such assets, we reserve the right to modify the contract as necessary to prevent you
from being considered as the owner of the assets of the contract for purposes of the
Code.
Non-Natural Owners
A trust or corporation or other Owner that is not a natural person
(“Non-Natural Owner”) should consult a tax adviser. Generally, the Code
does not confer tax-deferred status upon a Non-Qualified contract owned by a Non-Natural Owner for federal income tax purposes. Instead in such cases, the Non-Natural Owner pays tax each year on the
contract’s “income on the contract” (as defined in the
tax
law).
However, certain exceptions may apply, such as for contracts held by a trust or other
entity as an agent for a natural person or contracts held by certain employer sponsored
retirement arrangements. If an exception applies, the entity’s general interest deduction under the Code may be limited. Finally, certain non-qualified deferred compensation plans are subject to special tax
rules. Please consult a tax advisor if you are a Non-Natural Owner of a
contract.
Tax Treatment of Purchase Payments
Purchase Payments paid to a Non-Qualified contract
are neither excludible from the gross income of the contract Owner nor deductible for
tax purposes. In general, your cost basis in a Non-Qualified contract is equal to the
Purchase Payments you put into the contract less any amounts previously received from the contract that were not includible in income.
Tax Treatment of Distributions
Partial Withdrawals
If you make a partial withdrawal from a Non-Qualified contract, the IRC generally treats such withdrawals as taxable to the extent your contract value
before the withdrawal (determined before the application of any surrender charge)
exceeds your cost basis. Partial withdrawals from a Non-Qualified contract that has Purchase Payments made before August 14, 1982, are an
important exception to this general rule and are treated as
first coming from the pre-August 14, 1982 Purchase
Payments.
Amounts received under an automatic withdrawal plan are treated as
withdrawals and not annuity payments for purposes of calculating taxable income.
Optional Living Benefits/Other Benefits
Generally, we will treat amounts credited to the contract value under the optional Living Benefit
guarantees, for income tax purposes, as earnings in the contract. Thus, payments of
Living Benefits are treated as taxable withdrawals to the extent there are taxable gains in the contract value. Payments in accordance with such guarantees after the contract value has been
reduced to zero may be treated for tax purposes as amounts received as an annuity, if
the other requirements for such treatment are satisfied. All payments or withdrawals
after cost basis has been reduced to zero, whether or not under such a guarantee, will be treated as taxable amounts. If available and you elect an optional Living Benefit, the application of
certain tax rules, including those rules relating to distributions from your contract,
are not entirely clear. Such benefits are not intended to adversely affect the tax treatment of distributions or of the contract. However, you should be aware that little guidance is available.
You should consult a tax adviser before electing an optional Living
Benefit.
Full Surrenders
In the case of a full surrender of a Non-Qualified
contract, the amount received on surrender is taxable to the extent it exceeds the cost basis.
Assignments and Gratuitous Transfers
If you transfer ownership of your Non-Qualified contract to a person other than your spouse (or
former spouse incident to a divorce) you will owe federal income tax on the
contract’s cash surrender value to the extent it exceeds your cost basis. The
transferee’s cost basis will be increased to reflect the amount the transferor includes in income.
An assignment or pledge (or agreement to assign or pledge) of any portion of a Non-Qualified
contract will be treated as a withdrawal. If the entire contract value is assigned or
pledged, subsequent increases in the contract value are also treated as withdrawals for as long as the assignment or pledge remains in place. The cost basis is increased by the amount included in income
with respect to such assignment or pledge.
Aggregation Rule
If you purchase multiple non-qualified annuity contracts from the same insurance company (or its
affiliates), within the same calendar year, the IRS generally requires these annuity
contracts to be aggregated and treated as a single contract for purposes of determining the taxable income
57
associated
with any distribution taken from the contracts for tax purposes. For purposes of this rule, contracts received in a Section 1035 exchange will be considered issued in the year of the exchange. (However, the
contracts may be treated as issued on the issue date of the contract being exchanged,
for certain purposes, including determining whether the contract is an immediate annuity contract.) Aggregation impacts the amount of the distributions described above that is subject to taxation (and
potentially subject to the 10% additional tax, if applicable). Owners should seek their
own tax advice if you are purchasing more than one annuity from the same insurance company (or its affiliates) in the same calendar year.
Annuity Payments
If you annuitize your Non-Qualified contract, a portion of each annuity income payment will be
considered, for tax purposes, to be a return of a portion of your cost basis. The
portion of each annuity income payment that is considered a return of your cost basis
will not be taxed. Your annuity income payment will be considered fully taxable after you
have received a return of the entire amount of your cost basis.
Death Benefits
The taxable amount of any death benefits paid under the contract are taxable to the Beneficiary. The rules governing the taxation of payments from a
Non-Qualified annuity contract, as discussed above, generally apply whether the death
benefit is paid as lump sum or annuity income payments. Estate taxes may also apply.
Enhanced death benefits (if applicable to your contract) are used as investment protection and are not expected to give rise to any adverse tax effects. However,
the IRS could take the position that some or all the charges for these death benefits
should be treated as a partial withdrawal from the contract. In that case, the amount of the partial withdrawal may be includible in taxable income and subject to the 10% additional tax if the Owner is under
59½, unless another exception applies. You should consult your tax adviser
regarding these features and benefits prior to purchasing a contract.
Upon death, any remaining amounts in the contract must be distributed in accordance with the requirements under the Code. For deaths that occur after the contract’s annuity start date, payments under the annuity option elected will continue to be paid at least as rapidly as under the method of distribution in effect at such Owner’s death. For deaths that occur prior to the contract’s annuity start date,
the entire interest in the contract can be paid in one of the following manner:
1.
Lump sum payment of the death benefit.
2.
Payment of the entire death benefit within five years of the date of any Owner’s death.
3.
Payment of the death benefit over the lifetime of the Beneficiary or over a period not extending beyond
the life expectancy of the Beneficiary. Under this option, distributions must begin within one year
of the date of any Owner’s death. Note - This option is not available for a
Beneficiary that is a non-natural person.
4.
Spousal Option Only. The spousal Beneficiary can elect to treat the annuity contract as their own.
Special rules apply
if the Owner is a non-natural person, where the annuitant is generally treated as the Owner.
10% Additional Tax
The taxable portion of any distribution, whether annuity income payment or other withdrawal, prior to the Owner reaching age 59½ is subject to a 10%
additional tax unless an exception applies. Some of the main exceptions include:
•
when paid to your Beneficiary after you die;
•
after you become permanently disabled (as defined in the IRC);
•
when paid as a part of a series of substantially equal periodic payments (not less frequently than
annually) made for your life (or life expectancy) or the joint lives (or joint life
expectancies) of you and your designated Beneficiary;
•
under an immediate annuity contract; or
•
when attributable to Purchase Payments made prior to August 14, 1982.
Other exceptions may available depending on contract type and
your circumstances. Please consult your tax advisor or www.irs.gov for more information.
Net Investment Income Tax
There is a 3.8% tax on net investment income for Owners with Modified Adjusted Gross Income (“MAGI”) that exceeds certain thresholds based on
the type of filer. Further information may be found on www.irs.gov. For this purpose,
net investment income generally will include taxable distributions from a Non-Qualified contract. It is also possible the tax could apply to other taxable amounts relating to your Non-Qualified contract.
Please consult your tax advisor. This tax generally does not apply to Qualified
contracts; however, taxable distributions from such contracts may be considered in
determining the MAGI threshold.
Tax Treatment of Exchanges
The Non-Qualified contract may be issued in exchange for
all or part of another annuity contract that you own. In addition, the contract Owner
may be permitted to exchange the contract for a new annuity contract prior to the
commencement of annuity income payments. A full or partial exchange of one annuity
contract for another is a tax-free transaction under IRC section 1035, provided that
the requirements of that section are satisfied. Please note that the exchange may be
tax reportable. If you exchange part of an existing annuity contract for another annuity
58
contract,
and within 180 days of the exchange you receive a distribution other than certain annuity payments, the exchange may not be tax free. You should consult a tax advisor when exchanging part or all of an
annuity contract.
Qualified
Contracts
In General
Qualified contracts taxation varies with the type of plan and terms and conditions of each specific plan. You will get no additional tax advantage from this
contract if you are investing through a Qualified contract beyond the treatment
provided to alternative qualifying arrangements such as trusts or custodial accounts.
However, in both cases the contract offers features and benefits that other investments
may not offer. You and your financial representative should carefully consider whether
the features and benefits, including the investment options, lifetime annuity income
options, protection through Living Benefits, death benefits and other benefits provided under an annuity contract issued in connection with a Qualified contract are suitable for your needs and objectives and are
appropriate in light of the expense.
The terms of the plan may limit the rights otherwise available under the contracts. The Code and, if applicable, your contract or Qualified Arrangement,
may have limitations and restrictions such as: the amount that can be contributed; the
form, manner and timing of distributions; vesting and non-forfeitability of interests; nondiscrimination in eligibility and participation; and the tax treatment of distributions, withdrawals and
surrenders. Some of these limitations are adjusted annually. Please see www.IRS.gov or
consult your tax advisor.
The following are general summary descriptions of the types of Qualified Arrangements with which the
Qualified contracts may be used. Not all plan types will be available under your
contract. Descriptions of such arrangements are not exhaustive and are for general information purposes only. The tax rules regarding Qualified Arrangements are very complex and will have differing
applications depending on individual facts and circumstances. Each prospective
purchaser should obtain competent tax advice prior to purchasing a contract issued
under a qualified plan.
Note that the Company no longer issues new Qualified contracts other than IRAs, SEP IRAs, or ROTH
IRAs.
Plans of Self-Employed Individuals: “H.R. 10 Plans”
Section 401 of the Code permits self-employed individuals to establish qualified plans for
themselves and their employees, commonly referred to as “H.R. 10” or “Keogh” Plans.
Pension and Profit Sharing Plans
401(a)/401(k)
The Code permits certain employers to establish various types of retirement plans, including 401(k)
plans, for employees. These retirement plans may permit the purchase
of the
Qualified contracts to provide benefits under the plan. Contributions to the contracts will be restricted by the Code and the terms of the plan.
Tax-Sheltered Annuity (403(b))
Section 403(b) of the Code permits the purchase of “tax-sheltered annuities” by public
educational institutions and tax-exempt organizations described in Section 501(c)(3) of
the Code.
Treasury regulations include several rules and requirements, such as a requirement that employers
maintain their 403(b) plans pursuant to a written plan. The regulations, subsequent IRS
guidance, and the terms of the written plan may impose restrictions on both new and existing Qualified contracts, including restrictions on the availability of loans, distributions, transfers and
exchanges, regardless of when a contract was purchased.
In general, certain contracts originally established by
a IRS Revenue Ruling 90-24 transfer prior to September 25, 2007 are exempt (or
grandfathered) from some of the requirements of the regulations; provided that no salary
reduction or other contributions have ever been made to the contract, and that no
additional transfers are made to the contract on or after September 24, 2007.
Effective January 1, 2009 the Company no longer accepts new Purchase Payments (including
contributions, transfers and exchanges) into new or existing 403(b) annuities.
Traditional Individual Retirement Annuities (IRA), SEP IRA, or Roth IRA
The IRA Disclosure Statement, ROTH IRA Disclosure Statement, or Traditional, SEP, and Roth Individual Retirement Annuity (IRA) Combined Disclosure
Statement which was received at the time of original issue of your IRA, SEP IRA or Roth
IRA contains information about eligibility, contribution limits, distribution restrictions and other tax information. For further information about contributions and distributions from your IRA,
please see Publications 590-A and 590-B on the IRS website at www.irs.gov.
Traditional Individual Retirement Annuities
Section 408(b) of the Code permits eligible individuals
to contribute to an individual retirement program known as a traditional IRA. Under
applicable limitations, certain amounts (adjusted annually) may be contributed to an IRA.
Such contributions may be deductible, depending on your modified gross income.
Roth IRAs
Section 408A of the Code permits an individual to contribute to an individual retirement account called a Roth IRA. Contributions to a Roth IRA are not
deductible, but distributions are tax-free if certain requirements are satisfied.
Unlike traditional IRAs, to which everyone can
59
contribute
even if they cannot deduct the full contribution, Roth IRAs have income limitations on who can make regular cash contributions.
Simplified Employee Pension Plan
(“SEP”) IRA
Sole proprietors, partnerships, and corporations, including S corporations, can set up SEPs.
Employer contributions under a SEP are made to a separate IRAs established for each
participating employee, and generally must be made at a rate representing a uniform
percent of participating employees’ compensation. Through 1996, employees of
certain small employers (other than tax-exempt organizations) were permitted to
establish plans allowing employees to contribute pretax, on a salary reduction basis,
to the SEP (known as SARSEPs).
Deferred Compensation Plans —
Section 457
A unit of a state or local government may establish a deferred compensation program for individuals
who perform services for the government unit if permitted by applicable state (and/or
local) laws. In addition, a non-governmental tax-exempt employer may establish a deferred compensation program for individuals who: (i) perform services for the employer, and (ii) belong to either a
select group of management or highly compensated employees or, if provided under the
deferred compensation arrangement, independent contractors.
The employer uses deferred amounts to purchase the
contracts offered by this prospectus. For plans maintained by a unit of a state or
local government, the contract is generally held for the exclusive benefit of plan Participants. For plans of non-governmental tax-exempt employers, the employee has no present ownership rights in
the Contract and is entitled to payment only in accordance with the eligible deferred
compensation plan (an “EDCP”) provisions and, where applicable, any trust under which the contract may be held. Non-governmental 457 plan assets must remain assets of the employer and are subject to
claims by the creditors of the employer.
Under these plans, contributions made for the benefit of the employees will not be includible in the employees’ gross income until distributed from, or if
a non-governmental tax-exempt employer, otherwise made available to the
recipient.
Tax Treatment of Purchase Payments
For employer-sponsored arrangements, Purchase Payments under Qualified contracts can be made as
contributions by employers or as pre-tax or after-tax contributions by employees,
depending on the type of retirement program. For IRAs, Purchase Payments also can be made as a pre-tax or after-tax contribution. If you make contributions on a pre-tax basis, then you have no cost basis
in your contract. However, you normally will have cost basis in a Roth IRA, a
designated Roth account in a 403(b), 401(k), or
governmental
457(b) plan, and you may have cost basis in a non-deductible traditional IRA or in another Qualified contract.
Limitations and restrictions may apply to Purchase Payments. Please refer to www.IRS.gov for further information, as these limitations and restrictions
may be based on several factors.
Various penalty and excise taxes may apply to contributions made in violation of applicable contribution limits. You should consult a qualified tax advisor
associated with any questions related to the contribution to or transfer from an
employer sponsored retirement plan or arrangement, IRA, or Roth IRA.
Tax Treatment of Distributions
Distributions from Qualified contracts, other than IRAs and Roth IRAs, are often limited by the IRC and by the terms of the employer-sponsored retirement plan.
In some cases, distributions are not available unless there has been a distributable
event as defined by the terms of the plan. All distributions are tax at ordinary income tax rates. Various penalty taxes may apply to distributions made in violation of applicable requirements. Furthermore,
certain contractual withdrawal penalties and restrictions may apply to surrenders from
Qualified contracts. You should consult a qualified tax advisor associated with any questions related to the distribution or transfer from an employer sponsored retirement plan or arrangement, IRA, or Roth
IRA.
Non-Roth Qualified
Contracts. Distributions from Qualified contracts other than Roth IRAs and designated Roth accounts (described below) are taxable, except to
the extent allocable to after-tax contributions or non-deductible traditional IRA
contributions.
Roth IRAs and Designated Roth Accounts. “Qualified”
distributions from Roth IRAs and Designated Roth Accounts upon attainment of age
59½, upon death or disability, or for qualifying first-time homebuyer expenses (Roth IRAs only) are tax-free as long as five or more years have passed since the first contribution to the
taxpayer’s first Roth IRA or Designated Roth Account. Qualified distributions may be subject to state income tax in some states. Special tax rules will apply to distributions that are
not qualified and such distributions are generally subject to the same 10% additional
tax on amounts included in income as for other IRAs. Distributions of rollover or conversion contributions may be subject to a 10% additional tax if the distribution of those contributions is made within
five years of the rollover or conversion.
Designated Roth and Roth IRA
Conversions. All persons may be eligible to convert a distribution from an employer-sponsored plan or from a traditional IRA into a Roth IRA. Conversions from qualified
contracts into Roth IRAs normally require taxes to be paid in the year of the
conversion on any previously untaxed amounts included in
60
the amount
converted. The taxable value of such a conversion may consider the value of certain benefits under the contract.
457 Plans.Amounts received from an EDCP are includible in gross income for the taxable year in which they are
paid or, if a non-governmental tax-exempt employer, otherwise made available to the
recipient.
Annuitization. If you annuitize your Qualified contract, special tax rules apply to determine the taxable amount of your annuity income payment depending on
your Qualified Arrangement. Please consult your tax advisor.
10% Additional
Tax. You should consult your tax adviser as to the availability of an exemption from,
or reduction of, such tax under an applicable income tax treaty, if any. The taxable
portion of any distribution, whether annuity income payment or other withdrawal, prior to the Owner of a Qualified contract reaching age 59½ is subject to a 10% additional tax unless an exception
applies. Some of the main exceptions include:
•
when paid to your Beneficiary after you die;
•
after you become permanently disabled (as defined in the IRC); and
•
as a part of a series of substantially equal periodic payments (not less frequently than annually)
made for your life (or life expectancy) or the joint lives (or joint expectancies) of
you and your designated Beneficiary.
Other exceptions
may be applicable under certain circumstances. In addition, you may be able to repay certain distributions if certain requirements are satisfied. Distributions from a SIMPLE IRA within two
years after first participating in the Plan may be subject to a 25% additional tax,
rather than a 10% additional tax.
Direct and Indirect Rollovers
A rollover distribution, including eligible rollover
distributions as defined below, from an IRA, 403(b) TSA, qualified plan or governmental
457(b) deferred compensation plan may generally be rolled over into another IRA, 403(b)
TSA, qualified plan or governmental 457(b) deferred compensation plan, if permitted by the plan.
An eligible rollover distribution is the taxable portion of any amount received by a covered employee from a retirement plan qualified under Sections 401(a) or
403(a) or, if from a plan of a governmental employer, under Section 457(b) of the Code,
or from a tax-sheltered annuity qualified under Section 403(b) of the Code. Generally, certain types of distributions are not considered eligible rollover distributions, such as distributions received on
account of:
a.
a required minimum distribution,
b.
a hardship withdrawal, or
c.
a series of substantially equal payments (at least annually) made over your life expectancy or the joint life expectancies of you and your designated
Beneficiary, or a distribution made for a specified period of 10 years or more.
A rollover distribution (including an eligible rollover
distribution) may be transferred as a direct or indirect rollover. In a direct
rollover, the funds are directly transferred from one Qualified Arrangement to another. In an indirect rollover, the individual receives a distribution from the Qualified Arrangement and
reinvests it in another Qualified Arrangement within 60 days of the distribution. For
indirect rollovers, you must include in your income for the year the taxable amount of any portion of the distribution that you do not roll over. An indirect rollover of an eligible rollover distribution
will be subject to a mandatory 20% withholding tax (described
below).
Individuals are only permitted to make one indirect rollover from an IRA to another IRA in any
one-year period. It is important to note that the one rollover per year limitation does
not apply to amounts taken as an eligible rollover distribution from an employer sponsored retirement arrangement or from amounts transferred directly between IRAs in a trustee-to-trustee
transfer.
Funds may generally be rolled over tax-free from a SIMPLE IRA to another IRA. However, during the
two-year period beginning on the date you first participate in any SIMPLE IRA plan of
your employer, SIMPLE IRA funds may only be rolled to another SIMPLE IRA.
You should always consult your tax adviser before you move or attempt to move any
funds.
Tax Treatment of Death Benefits
The taxable amount of any death benefits paid under the contract are taxable to the Beneficiary. The
rules governing the taxation of payments from an annuity contract, as discussed above,
generally apply whether the death benefit is paid as lump sum or annuity income payments. Estate taxes may also apply.
Enhanced death benefits (if applicable to your contract) are used as investment protection and are
not expected to give rise to any adverse tax effects. However, the IRS could take the
position that some or all the charges for these death benefits should be treated as a partial withdrawal from the contract. In that case, the amount of the partial withdrawal may be includible in taxable income and
subject to the 10% additional tax described above if the Owner is under 59½,
unless another exception applies. The IRS may consider these benefits “incidental
death benefits” or “life insurance.” You should consult your tax adviser regarding these features and benefits prior to purchasing a Qualified contract. See below for required distributions
after the death of the Owner.
61
Required Minimum Distributions
Your required minimum distribution (RMD) is the minimum amount you must withdraw from your Qualified
Arrangement each year after your required beginning date. The RMD rules do not apply to
Roth IRAs or designated Roth accounts when the Owner is alive.
Failure to satisfy the minimum distribution requirements may result in an excise tax. A 25% excise
tax may be assessed on any RMD that is required but not taken timely. However, if the
late RMD is taken within a two-year period, the penalty may be reduced to 10% if certain conditions are satisfied. You should consult your tax adviser for more information.
Required Beginning Date
Generally, the IRC requires that you begin taking annual distributions from Qualified contracts by December 31 of the calendar year in which you attain the
“applicable age”:
•
Age 75 if you were born January 1, 1960 or later.
•
Age 73 if you were born on or after January 1, 1951, and before January 1, 1960.
•
Age 72 if you were born on or after July 1, 1949, and before January 1, 1951.
•
Age 70 ½ if you were born before July 1, 1949.
For employer sponsored retirement plans, you must begin
distributions on the later of (1) reaching the applicable age, or (2) the calendar year
in which you sever employment from the employer sponsoring the
plan.
You may choose to delay your first distribution until April 1 of the calendar year following in
which you reach the applicable age or sever employment, as applicable. However, if you choose to delay your first distribution, you will be required to withdraw your second RMD on or before December 31 in that same year. For each year
thereafter, you must withdraw your RMD by December 31.
For 403(b) contracts, amounts accumulated under a
Contract on December 31, 1986, may be subject to special distribution rules.
Combining Distributions from Multiple Qualified Contracts
If you own more than one IRA, you may be permitted to
take your RMD in any combination from your IRAs. A similar rule applies if you own more than one 403(b) account, unless the plan, contract, or account
otherwise provides. However, you cannot satisfy this distribution requirement for your
IRA contract by taking a distribution from a 403(b) account, and you cannot satisfy the
requirement for your 403(b) account by taking a distribution from an IRA.
Automatic Withdrawal Option
If available, you may elect to have the RMD amount for your contract calculated and withdrawn each year under the automatic withdrawal option. You may
select monthly,
quarterly, semiannual, or annual withdrawals for this purpose. This service is provided as a
courtesy, and we do not guarantee the accuracy of our calculations.
Impact of Optional Benefits
The annuity contract value used to determine RMDs includes the actuarial present value of other
benefits under the Qualified contract, such as enhanced death benefits and/or Living
Benefits. As a result, if you request a minimum distribution calculation, or if one is otherwise required to be provided, in those specific circumstances where this requirement applies, the calculation may be
based upon a value that is greater than your contract value, resulting in a larger RMD.
This does not apply to RMDs made under an irrevocable annuity income option.
We recommend you consult your tax adviser concerning your required minimum distribution.
Required After Death Distributions
Upon death, any remaining amounts in the Qualified contract must be distributed in accordance with the requirements under the IRC. The timing of these
distributions will depend on whether the death occurs before the Owner was required to
take RMDs, the type of Beneficiary, and the Beneficiary’s relationship to the
deceased Owner. The information provided below applies to Owners who die after 2019
(after 2021 for certain governmental and collectively bargained retirement plans). For
Owners’ deaths prior to such dates, individuals should consult a tax advisor regarding the applicable after-death distribution requirements.
Eligible designated Beneficiaries (“EDB”) are generally a natural person designated as a Beneficiary (“designated beneficiaries”) who are
also:
•
the surviving spouse of the Owner; or
•
an individual who is not more than ten years younger than the Owner.
If the Beneficiary
is an EDB, the entire amount in the contract generally must be paid to the EDB:
•
if the owner had not reached their required beginning date for RMDs
○
within 5 years after the owner’s death, or
○
by December 31st of the year following the year of death and be paid over the lifetime or single life expectancy of the EDB; or
•
if the owner had reached their required beginning date for RMDs, payments must continue at least as
rapidly as was required for the Owner and all amounts must be distributed within 5
years of the owner’s death.
Exceptions to this
rule may apply in the case of an EDB who is also the Owner’s spouse.
62
If a
Beneficiary is a designated beneficiary, the entire amount in the Contract must be distributed either:
•
if the Owner had not reached their required beginning date for RMDs, within 5 years after the owner’s death, or
•
if the Owner had reached their required beginning date for RMDs, payments must continue at least as rapidly as was required for the Owner and all
amounts must be distributed within 5 years of the owner’s death.
If the Beneficiary is not a designated beneficiary or an EDB, the
Beneficiary must receive the entire amount in the contract:
•
if the Owner had not reached their required beginning date for RMDs, within 5 years after the
owner’s death, or
•
if the Owner had reached their required beginning date for RMDs, payments must continue at least as
rapidly as was required for the Owner.
Additional rules,
requirements, and exceptions may apply. Please consult a tax
advisor.
Gifts, Pledges, Assignments of and/or Loans from a Qualified Contract
Qualified contracts are prohibited from being transferred, assigned or pledged as security for a
loan. This generally does not apply to loans under an employer-sponsored retirement plan (including loans from the annuity contract) that satisfy certain requirements,
provided that the plan is not an unfunded deferred compensation plan. Another exception
to this rule includes an assignment pursuant to a domestic relations order meeting the requirements of the plan or arrangement under which the contract is issued (for many plans, a Qualified Domestic
Relations Order, or “QDRO”), or, in the case of an IRA, pursuant to a
decree of divorce or separation maintenance or a written instrument incident to such
decree.
For certain qualified arrangements, a default of a loan may be considered a taxable distribution and
may be subject to a 10% additional tax if the distribution occurred prior to your
attainment of age 59.5 unless an exception applies. Please see the terms of your loan
for specifics regarding your loan and the tax impact of defaults.
You should consult a tax advisor as to the availability
of these and any other exceptions.
Tax Withholding and Reporting
In General
Taxable amounts distributed from annuity contracts are subject to federal and state income tax
reporting and withholding. In general, we will withhold federal income tax from the
taxable portion of such distribution based on the type of distribution and, in certain cases, the amount of your distribution. An election out of federal withholding must be
made in accordance with the IRS guidance as directed on forms that we provide. If an election out of withholding or election of another amount is not made,
withholding is imposed (1) for periodic payments, at the rate that would be imposed if
the payments were wages, and the payee was single with no adjustments, or (2) for other distributions, at the rate of 10%. If you are a U.S. person (which includes a resident alien), and your address of
record is a non-U.S. address, we are required to withhold income tax unless payments
are directed to your U.S. residential address. We are also required to withhold if you
do not provide a valid TIN.
State income tax withholding rules vary, and we will
withhold based on the rules of your state of residence. Your state may require any election associated with withholding to be undertaken on the state’s
prescribed form.
Special tax rules apply to withholding for non-United States
persons, and we generally withhold income tax for such non-United States persons at a rate of 30%
of the taxable amount. A different withholding rate may be applicable to a non-United States person based on the terms of an existing income tax treaty between the United States and the non-United States person’s country. To qualify for any reduced withholding, the non-United States person must provide applicable certifications under Form W-8 BEN-E, Form W-8IMY, or other applicable form. Any
Form W-8, including the Form W-8 BEN-E and Form W-8IMY, is only effective for three
years from date of signature unless a change in circumstances makes any information on the form incorrect. You should consult your tax adviser as to the availability of an exemption from, or reduction of, such tax under an applicable income tax treaty,
if any. Note, any payments made to a foreign entity, where such entity fails to provide the applicable certifications, may result in a 30% withholding on certain gross payments,
which could include distributions from annuity contracts.
Any income tax withheld is a credit against your
income tax liability. Regardless of the amount withheld by us, you are liable for
payment of federal and state income tax on the taxable portion of annuity distributions. You should consult with your tax adviser regarding the payment of the correct amount of these income taxes and
potential liability if you fail to pay such taxes.
20% Federal Income Tax Withholding on Eligible Rollover Distributions
For certain qualified employer sponsored plans, we are required to withhold 20% of the taxable portion of your withdrawal that constitutes an eligible rollover distribution for federal income
taxes. This requirement is mandatory and cannot be waived by the Owner. You may
avoid withholding if you do a direct rollover between Qualified Arrangements.
63
Generation Skipping Transfer Tax Withholding
Under certain circumstances, the IRC may impose generation skipping transfer tax when all or a part of an annuity contract is transferred (including a death benefit paid)
to an individual two or more generations younger than the owner. The
Company may be required to undertake withholding associated with such a transaction. Contract Owners should consult a tax advisor with any questions.
Civil Unions and Domestic
Partnerships
Parties
to a state civil union or domestic partnership are not treated as married
under federal law. Accordingly, certain
transactions (such as a change of ownership or spousal continuation) may
be taxable to those persons. Contract Owners should consult a tax advisor with any questions.
Our Taxes
The Company is taxed as a life insurance company under the Code. For federal income tax purposes,
the Separate Account is not a separate entity from the Company and its operations form
a part of the Company. We are entitled to certain tax benefits related to the investment of Company assets, including assets of the Separate Account, which may include foreign tax credits
and the corporate dividends received deduction. These potential benefits are not passed
back to you, since we are the owner of the assets from which tax benefits may be
derived.
Other Information
The Distributor
Corebridge Capital Services, Inc., 30 Hudson Street, 16th Floor, Jersey City, NJ 07302, distributes the contracts. Corebridge Capital Services, Inc., a wholly-owned subsidiary of AGL, is a registered broker-dealer under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, and is a member of the Financial Industry Regulatory Authority
(“FINRA”). No underwriting fees are retained by Corebridge Capital
Services, Inc. in connection with the distribution of the contracts.
The Company
American General Life Insurance Company
American General Life Insurance Company (“AGL”) is a stock life insurance company organized under the laws of the state of Texas. Its home office is
2727-A Allen Parkway, Houston, Texas 77019-2191.
Contracts are issued by AGL in all states, except New York.
AGL is obligated to pay all amounts promised to investors under a contract issued by
AGL.
Operation of the Company
The operations of the Company are influenced by many factors, including general economic conditions, monetary and fiscal policies of the federal
government, and policies of state and other regulatory authorities. The level of sales of
the Company’s financial and insurance products is influenced by many factors,
including general market rates of interest, the strength, weakness and volatility of equity markets, terms and conditions of competing financial and insurance products and the relative value of such
brands.
The Company is exposed to market risk, interest rate risk, contract Owner behavior risk and
mortality/longevity risk. Market volatility may result in increased risks related to
guaranteed death and Living Benefits on the Company’s financial and insurance products, as well as reduced fee income in the case of assets held in separate accounts, where applicable. These guaranteed benefits
are sensitive to equity market and other conditions. The Company primarily uses capital
market hedging strategies to help cover the risk of paying guaranteed Living
Benefits in excess of account values as a result of significant downturns in equity
markets or as a result of other factors. The Company has treaties to reinsure a portion
of the guaranteed minimum income benefits and guaranteed death benefits for equity and
mortality risk on some of its older contracts. Such risk mitigation may or may not
reduce the volatility of net income and capital and surplus resulting from equity market
volatility.
The Company is regulated for the benefit of contract Owners by the insurance regulator in its state of domicile; and also by all state insurance
departments where it is licensed to conduct business. The Company is required by its
regulators to hold a specified amount of reserves in order to meet its contractual
obligations to contract Owners. Insurance regulations also require the Company to maintain additional surplus to protect against a financial impairment the amount of which is based on the
risks inherent in the Company’s operations.
The Separate Account
Variable Annuity Account Five is a separate account of AGL under
Texas law. It may be used to support the contract and other variable annuity contracts, and used for other permitted purposes.
The Separate Account is registered with the SEC as a unit investment trust under the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended.
Purchase Payments you make that are allocated to the Variable Portfolios are invested in the Separate Account. The Company owns the assets in the
Separate Account and invests them on your behalf, according to your instructions.
Purchase Payments invested in the Separate Account are not guaranteed and will
fluctuate with the value of the Variable Portfolios you select. Therefore, you assume all of the investment risk for contract value allocated to the
64
Variable
Portfolios. These assets are kept separate from our General Account and may not be charged with liabilities arising from any other business we may conduct. Additionally, income gains and losses (realized and
unrealized) resulting from assets in the Separate Account are credited to or charged
against the Separate Account without regard to other income gains or losses of the
Company.
You benefit from dividends received by the Separate Account through an increase in your unit value. The Company expects to benefit from these dividends
through tax credits and corporate dividends received deductions; however, these
corporate deductions are not passed back to the Separate Account or to contract Owners.
The General Account
Obligations that are paid out of the Company’s general account (“General Account”)
include any amounts you have allocated to available Fixed Accounts, including any interest credited thereon, and amounts owed under your contract for death and/or Living Benefits which are in
excess of portions of contract value allocated to the Variable Portfolios. The
obligations and guarantees under the contract are the sole responsibility of the
Company. Therefore, payments of these obligations are subject to our financial strength and claims paying ability, and our long term ability to make such payments.
The General Account assets are invested in accordance with applicable state regulation. These assets
are exposed to the typical risks normally associated with a portfolio of fixed income
securities, namely interest rate, option, liquidity and credit risk. The Company manages its exposure to these risks by, among other things, closely monitoring and matching the duration and cash flows of its
assets and liabilities, monitoring or limiting prepayment and extension risk in its
portfolio, maintaining a large percentage of its portfolio in highly liquid securities and engaging in a disciplined process of underwriting, reviewing and monitoring credit risk. With respect to the
Living Benefits available in your contract, we also manage interest rate and certain
market risk through a hedging strategy in the portfolio and we may require that those who elect a Living Benefit allocate their Purchase Payments in accordance with specified investment
parameters.
Contracts issued on or prior
to December 29, 2006 were issued with a guarantee (the “Guarantee”) by American Home Assurance Company (the “Guarantor”).
Please see APPENDIX D for more information.
Financial Statements
The financial statements described below are important for you to consider. Information about how to obtain these financial statements is also provided
below.
The Company and Separate Account
The financial statements of the Company and the Separate Account are required to be made available
because you must look to those entities directly to satisfy our obligations to you
under the Contract. If your contract is covered by the Guarantee, financial statements of the Guarantor are also provided in relation to its ability to meet its obligations under the Guarantee; please see APPENDIX D for more information.
Instructions to Obtain Financial Statements
The financial statements of the Company, Separate Account and Guarantor are included in the Statement of Additional Information and available on the Company’s
website at www.corebridgefinancial.com/ProductProspectuses and on SEC’s website at www.sec.gov. You may also request a free copy of the Statement of Additional Information by following the instructions on the back page or by contacting our Annuity Service Center at:
Mailing Address:
Annuity Service Center
P.O. Box 15570, Amarillo, Texas 79105-5570
Telephone Number: (800) 445-7862
Annuity Service Center
P.O. Box 15570, Amarillo, Texas 79105-5570
Telephone Number: (800) 445-7862
We encourage both existing and prospective contract Owners to read and understand the financial statements.
Administration
We are responsible for the administrative servicing of your contract. Please contact our Annuity Service Center at (800) 445-7862, if you have any comments,
questions or service requests.
We send out transaction confirmations and quarterly statements. During the Accumulation Phase, you will receive confirmation of transactions for your
contract. Transactions made pursuant to contractual or systematic agreements, such as
dollar cost averaging, if available, may be confirmed quarterly. Purchase Payments received through the automatic payment plan may also be confirmed quarterly. For all other transactions, we send
confirmations. It is your responsibility to review these documents carefully and notify
our Annuity Service Center of any inaccuracies immediately. We investigate all
inquiries. Depending on the facts and circumstances, we may retroactively adjust your contract, provided you notify us of your concern within 30 days of receiving the transaction confirmation or
quarterly statement. Any other adjustments we deem warranted are made as of the time we
receive notice of the error.
Legal Proceedings
There are no pending legal proceedings affecting the Separate Account, the Company, or the principal underwriter. Various federal, state or other regulatory agencies may from time to time review, examine or inquire into the operations, practices and
procedures of the Company, such as through financial examinations,
65
subpoenas,
investigations, market conduct exams or other regulatory inquiries. Based on the current status of pending regulatory examinations, investigations and inquiries involving the Company, the Company believes
that none of these matters will have a material adverse effect on the ability of the
principal underwriter to perform its contract with the Registrant or of the depositor to meet its obligations under the variable annuity contracts.
Various lawsuits against the Company have arisen in the ordinary course of business. As of the date of this prospectus, the Company believes that none of
these matters will have a material adverse effect on the ability of the principal
underwriter to perform its contract with the Registrant or of the depositor to meet its obligations under the variable annuity contracts.
Registration Statements
Registration statements under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, related to the contracts offered by this prospectus are on file with the SEC. This
prospectus does not contain all of the information contained in the registration
statements and exhibits. For further information regarding the Separate Account, the
Company and its General Account, American Home, if your contract is covered by the
Guarantee, the Variable Portfolios and the contract, please refer to the registration statements and exhibits.
66
Appendix A – Investment Options Available Under The Contract
Underlying Funds
The following is a list of Underlying Funds available under the contract. More information about the Underlying Funds is available in the prospectuses for the Underlying Funds, which may be amended from time to time and can be found online at www.corebridgefinancial.com/ProductProspectuses. You can also request this information at no cost by
calling (855) 421-2692.
The current expenses and performance information below reflect fees and
expenses of the Underlying Funds, but do not reflect the other fees and expenses that your contract may charge. Expenses would be higher and performance would be lower
if these other charges were included. Each Underlying Fund’s past performance is not necessarily an indication of future performance.
| Type |
Underlying Fund – Share Class
Advisor
Subadvisor (if applicable) |
Current
Expenses |
Average Annual Total Returns
(as of 12/31/2025) | ||
| 1 Year |
5 Year |
10 Year | |||
| Asset
Allocation |
Balanced Growth Strategy (for contracts purchased prior
to November 18, 2003)1 | ||||
| |
SA Allocation Moderate Portfolio – Class 1 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC |
0.76%* |
12.86% |
5.75% |
7.45% |
| |
SA Franklin Allocation Moderately Aggressive
Portfolio – Class 2
SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC
Franklin Advisers, Inc. |
1.04%* |
17.70% |
10.60% |
10.23% |
| |
SA MFS Large Cap Growth Portfolio – Class 2
SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC
Massachusetts Financial Services
Company |
0.83% |
16.52% |
14.96% |
15.99% |
| |
Balanced Growth Strategy (for contract purchased on or
after November 18, 2003)1 | ||||
| |
SA Allocation Moderate Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC |
1.01%* |
12.52% |
5.48% |
7.20% |
| |
SA Franklin Allocation Moderately Aggressive
Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC Franklin Advisers, Inc. |
1.14%* |
17.57% |
10.49% |
10.11% |
| |
SA MFS Large Cap Growth Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC Massachusetts Financial Services Company |
0.93% |
16.39% |
14.85% |
15.87% |
| |
Conservative Growth Strategy (for contracts purchased
prior to November 18, 2003)1 | ||||
| |
SA Allocation Balanced Portfolio – Class 1 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC |
0.75%* |
11.36% |
4.18% |
6.03% |
| |
SA Franklin Allocation Moderately Aggressive
Portfolio – Class 2
SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC
Franklin Advisers, Inc. |
1.04%* |
17.70% |
10.60% |
10.23% |
| |
SA MFS Large Cap Growth Portfolio – Class 2
SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC
Massachusetts Financial Services
Company |
0.83% |
16.52% |
14.96% |
15.99% |
| |
Conservative Growth Strategy (for contract purchased on
or after November 18, 2003)1 | ||||
| |
SA Allocation Balanced Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC |
1.00%* |
10.96% |
3.91% |
5.79% |
| |
SA Franklin Allocation Moderately Aggressive
Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC Franklin Advisers, Inc. |
1.14%* |
17.57% |
10.49% |
10.11% |
A-1
| Type |
Underlying Fund – Share Class
Advisor
Subadvisor (if applicable) |
Current
Expenses |
Average Annual Total Returns
(as of 12/31/2025) | ||
| 1 Year |
5 Year |
10 Year | |||
| Asset
Allocation
(continued) |
SA MFS Large Cap Growth Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC Massachusetts Financial Services Company |
0.93% |
16.39% |
14.85% |
15.87% |
| |
Growth Strategy (for contracts purchased prior to
November 18, 2003)1 | ||||
| |
SA Allocation Aggressive Portfolio – Class 1 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC |
0.78%* |
16.12% |
8.31% |
9.59% |
| |
SA Franklin Allocation Moderately Aggressive
Portfolio – Class 2
SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC
Franklin Advisers, Inc. |
1.04%* |
17.70% |
10.60% |
10.23% |
| |
SA MFS Large Cap Growth Portfolio – Class 2
SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC
Massachusetts Financial Services
Company |
0.83% |
16.52% |
14.96% |
15.99% |
| |
Growth Strategy (for contract purchased on or after
November 18, 2003)1 | ||||
| |
SA Allocation Aggressive Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC |
1.03%* |
15.84% |
8.05% |
9.34% |
| |
SA Franklin Allocation Moderately Aggressive
Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC Franklin Advisers, Inc. |
1.14%* |
17.57% |
10.49% |
10.11% |
| |
SA MFS Large Cap Growth Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC Massachusetts Financial Services Company |
0.93% |
16.39% |
14.85% |
15.87% |
| |
Moderate Growth Strategy (for contracts purchased prior
to November 18, 2003)1 | ||||
| |
SA Allocation Moderately Aggressive Portfolio – Class 1 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC |
0.76%* |
14.35% |
6.79% |
8.32% |
| |
SA Franklin Allocation Moderately Aggressive
Portfolio – Class 2
SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC
Franklin Advisers, Inc. |
1.04%* |
17.70% |
10.60% |
10.23% |
| |
SA MFS Large Cap Growth Portfolio – Class 2
SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC
Massachusetts Financial Services
Company |
0.83% |
16.52% |
14.96% |
15.99% |
| |
Moderate Growth Strategy (for contract purchased on or
after November 18, 2003)1 | ||||
| |
SA Allocation Moderately Aggressive Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC |
1.01%* |
14.13% |
6.52% |
8.07% |
| |
SA Franklin Allocation Moderately Aggressive
Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC Franklin Advisers, Inc. |
1.14%* |
17.57% |
10.49% |
10.11% |
| |
SA MFS Large Cap Growth Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC Massachusetts Financial Services Company |
0.93% |
16.39% |
14.85% |
15.87% |
| |
SA Allocation Aggressive Portfolio2 – Class 3
SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC |
1.03%* |
15.84% |
8.05% |
9.34% |
| |
SA Allocation Balanced Portfolio2 – Class 3
SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC |
1.00%* |
10.96% |
3.91% |
5.79% |
| |
SA Allocation Moderate Portfolio2 – Class 3
SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC |
1.01%* |
12.52% |
5.48% |
7.20% |
| |
SA Allocation Moderately Aggressive Portfolio2 – Class 3
SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC |
1.01%* |
14.13% |
6.52% |
8.07% |
A-2
| Type |
Underlying Fund – Share Class
Advisor
Subadvisor (if applicable) |
Current
Expenses |
Average Annual Total Returns
(as of 12/31/2025) | ||
| 1 Year |
5 Year |
10 Year | |||
| Bond |
Fidelity VIP Investment Grade Bond Portfolio3 – Service Class
2 Fidelity Management & Research
Company |
0.62% |
6.93% |
-0.21% |
2.45% |
| |
SA American Century Inflation Managed Portfolio4 – Class 3
SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC
American Century Investment Management,
Inc. |
0.85% |
6.21% |
0.63% |
2.06% |
| |
SA JPMorgan Ultra-Short Bond Portfolio4 – Class 25
SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC
J.P. Morgan Investment Management Inc.
|
0.70% |
4.41% |
2.30% |
1.54% |
| |
SA JPMorgan Ultra-Short Bond Portfolio4 – Class 3
SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC
J.P. Morgan Investment Management Inc.
|
0.80% |
4.39% |
2.20% |
1.45% |
| |
SA Multi-Managed Diversified Fixed Income Portfolio4 – Class 25
PineBridge Investments, LLC
Wellington Management Company LLP
|
0.87% |
6.72% |
-0.63% |
1.92% |
| |
SA Multi-Managed Diversified Fixed Income Portfolio4 – Class 3
PineBridge Investments, LLC
Wellington Management Company LLP
|
0.97% |
6.62% |
-0.73% |
1.83% |
| Cash |
Goldman Sachs VIT Government Money Market Fund3 – Service
Shares
Goldman Sachs Asset Management, L.P.
|
0.43%* |
3.94% |
2.98% |
1.90% |
| Stock |
Fidelity VIP Contrafund Portfolio3 – Class 2
Fidelity Management & Research
Company |
0.79% |
21.19% |
15.08% |
15.49% |
| |
Fidelity VIP Equity-Income Portfolio3 – Class 2
Fidelity Management & Research
Company |
0.71% |
18.75% |
12.23% |
11.32% |
| |
Fidelity VIP Mid Cap Portfolio3 – Class 2
Fidelity Management & Research
Company |
0.80% |
11.49% |
9.83% |
10.31% |
| |
Fidelity VIP Overseas Portfolio3 – Class 2
Fidelity Management & Research
Company |
0.97% |
20.05% |
6.35% |
7.66% |
| |
SA AB Growth Portfolio6 – Class 25
SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC
AllianceBernstein L.P. |
0.78% |
12.90% |
11.78% |
15.97% |
| |
SA AB Growth Portfolio6 – Class 3
SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC
AllianceBernstein L.P. |
0.88% |
12.79% |
11.67% |
15.85% |
| |
SA American Funds Global Growth Portfolio3,7 – Class 3
SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC
Capital Research and Management Company
|
0.95%* |
21.35% |
7.94% |
11.86% |
| |
SA American Funds Growth Portfolio3,7 – Class 3
SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC
Capital Research and Management Company
|
0.85%* |
19.91% |
13.07% |
17.65% |
| |
SA American Funds Growth-Income Portfolio3,7 – Class 3
SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC
Capital Research and Management Company
|
0.82%* |
17.67% |
13.57% |
13.59% |
| |
SA Columbia Focused Value Portfolio6 – Class 25
Columbia Management Investment Advisers,
LLC |
0.88%* |
27.88% |
13.30% |
12.45% |
| |
SA Columbia Focused Value Portfolio6 – Class 3
Columbia Management Investment Advisers,
LLC |
0.98%* |
27.67% |
13.18% |
12.33% |
| |
SA Multi-Managed International Equity Portfolio4 – Class 25
SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC
BlackRock Investment Management, LLC, Schroder
Investment Management North America
Inc. and T. Rowe Price Associates,
Inc. |
1.19%* |
29.17% |
7.39% |
7.75% |
A-3
| Type |
Underlying Fund – Share Class
Advisor
Subadvisor (if applicable) |
Current
Expenses |
Average Annual Total Returns
(as of 12/31/2025) | ||
| 1 Year |
5 Year |
10 Year | |||
| Stock
(continued) |
SA Multi-Managed International Equity Portfolio4 – Class 3
SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC
BlackRock Investment Management, LLC, Schroder
Investment Management North America
Inc. and T. Rowe Price Associates,
Inc. |
1.29%* |
29.06% |
7.29% |
7.63% |
| |
SA Multi-Managed Large Cap Growth Portfolio4 – Class 25
SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC
BlackRock Investment Management, LLC, Goldman Sachs
Asset Management, L.P. and Morgan
Stanley Investment Management
Inc. |
0.94%* |
19.62% |
9.76% |
14.80% |
| |
SA Multi-Managed Large Cap Growth Portfolio4 – Class 3
SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC
BlackRock Investment Management, LLC, Goldman Sachs
Asset Management, L.P. and Morgan
Stanley Investment Management
Inc. |
1.04%* |
19.51% |
9.66% |
14.68% |
| |
SA Multi-Managed Large Cap Value Portfolio4 – Class 25
SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC
BlackRock Investment Management, LLC, Federated MDTA
LLC, and Wellington Management Company
LLP8 |
1.00%* |
12.81% |
10.84% |
9.93% |
| |
SA Multi-Managed Large Cap Value Portfolio4 – Class 3
SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC
BlackRock Investment Management, LLC, Federated MDTA
LLC, and Wellington Management Company
LLP8 |
1.10%* |
12.67% |
10.73% |
9.82% |
| |
SA Multi-Managed Mid Cap Growth Portfolio4 – Class 25
SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC
BlackRock Investment Management, LLC, T. Rowe Price
Associates, Inc. and Wellington
Management Company LLP |
1.13% |
8.30% |
4.63% |
12.00% |
| |
SA Multi-Managed Mid Cap Growth Portfolio4 – Class 3
SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC
BlackRock Investment Management, LLC, T. Rowe Price
Associates, Inc. and Wellington
Management Company LLP |
1.23% |
8.14% |
4.52% |
11.88% |
| |
SA Multi-Managed Mid Cap Value Portfolio4 – Class 25
SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC
BlackRock Investment Management, LLC, T. Rowe Price
Associates, Inc. and Massachusetts
Financial Services Company |
1.15% |
7.19% |
10.04% |
9.38% |
| |
SA Multi-Managed Mid Cap Value Portfolio4 – Class 3
SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC
BlackRock Investment Management, LLC, T. Rowe Price
Associates, Inc. and Massachusetts
Financial Services Company |
1.25% |
7.03% |
9.93% |
9.27% |
| |
SA Multi-Managed Small Cap Portfolio4 – Class 25
SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC
BlackRock Investment Management, LLC, J.P. Morgan
Investment Management Inc. and
Schroder Investment Management North
America Inc. |
1.15% |
6.43% |
6.27% |
8.13% |
| |
SA Multi-Managed Small Cap Portfolio4 – Class 3
SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC
BlackRock Investment Management, LLC, J.P. Morgan
Investment Management Inc. and
Schroder Investment Management North
America Inc. |
1.25% |
6.26% |
6.16% |
8.02% |
| |
T. Rowe Price Blue Chip Growth Portfolio3 – II Class
T. Rowe Price Associates, Inc. |
1.00% |
18.43% |
11.41% |
15.25% |
| |
T. Rowe Price Equity Income Portfolio3 – II Class
T. Rowe Price Associates, Inc. |
0.99% |
14.07% |
10.89% |
10.24% |
| Volatility
Control |
SA VCP Dynamic Allocation Portfolio3 – Class 3
SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC
AllianceBernstein L.P. |
1.01% |
11.13% |
5.34% |
7.51% |
A-4
| Type |
Underlying Fund – Share Class
Advisor
Subadvisor (if applicable) |
Current
Expenses |
Average Annual Total Returns
(as of 12/31/2025) | ||
| 1 Year |
5 Year |
10 Year | |||
| Volatility
Control
(continued) |
SA VCP Dynamic Strategy Portfolio3 – Class 3
SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC
AllianceBernstein L.P. |
1.03% |
10.89% |
5.66% |
7.19% |
* This Underlying Fund is subject to an expense reimbursement or
fee waiver arrangement resulting in a temporary expense reduction. See the Underlying Fund prospectus for additional information.
1
Seasons Strategies are Variable Portfolios comprised of certain Underlying Funds of the Seasons Series Trust and SunAmerica Series Trust. Each Seasons Strategy is multi-managed by a group of managers identified above.
2
Part of Managed Allocation Portfolios.
3
Part of Premier Portfolios.
4
Part of Select Portfolios.
5
Available for investment if
you purchased your contract prior to November 18,
2003.
6
Part of Focused Portfolios.
7
Capital Research and Management Company is the investment adviser of the master
fund in which this Underlying Fund (Master-Feeder Fund) invests. Under a master-feeder fund structure, the feeder fund does not buy individual securities directly.
Rather, the feeder fund invests all of its investment assets in a corresponding master fund, which invests directly in individual securities.
8
On May 1, 2026, Federated MDTA LLC replaced the American Century Investment Management, Inc. as a subadvisor.
Fixed Accounts
The following is a list of Fixed Accounts currently available under the contract. We may change the features of the Fixed Accounts listed below, offer new Fixed Accounts, and terminate existing Fixed Accounts. We will provide you with written notice before doing so.
See INVESTMENT OPTIONS - FIXED ACCOUNTS of the prospectus for a description of the Fixed Accounts'
features.
| Name |
Terms |
Minimum Guaranteed Interest Rate |
| 1-Year Fixed Account |
1-Year |
1% |
| Dollar Cost Averaging Fixed Account |
6-Month, 12-Month, 2-Year |
1% |
A-5
SEASONS
STRATEGIES AVAILABLE FOR INVESTMENT
This section contains the Seasons Strategies available for investment.
Growth Strategy
Goal: Long-term growth of capital, allocating its assets primarily to stocks. This Seasons Strategy may be best suited for those with longer periods to
invest.
| Target Asset Allocation: | ||
| Stocks 85% |
|
Bonds 15% |
Balanced Growth Strategy
Goal: Focuses on conservation of principal by investing in a more balanced weighting of stocks and bonds,
with a secondary objective of seeking a high total return. This Seasons Strategy may be
best suited for those approaching retirement and with less tolerance for investment risk.
| Target Asset Allocation: | ||
| Stocks 70% |
|
Bonds 30% |
Moderate Growth Strategy
Goal: Growth of capital through investments in equities, with a secondary objective of conservation of principal by allocating more of its assets to bonds
than the Growth Strategy. This Seasons Strategy may be best suited for those nearing
retirement years but still earning income.
| Target Asset Allocation: | ||
| Stocks 75% |
|
Bonds 25% |
Conservative Growth Strategy
Goal: Capital preservation while maintaining some potential for growth over the long term. This Seasons
Strategy may be best suited for those with lower investment risk tolerance.
| Target Asset Allocation: | ||
| Stocks 60% |
|
Bonds 40% |
A-6
STRATEGIC ALLOCATION PROGRAM FOR
CONTRACTS ISSUED PRIOR TO FEBRUARY 6, 2017
Effective on February 6, 2017, we will no longer offer the Strategic Allocation
Program and we will no longer update the Strategic Allocation Program.
If you are currently invested in a Strategic Allocation, you will remain invested in the same Variable Portfolios and in the same amounts and weights as
before the Strategic Allocation Program was terminated; however, the investment will no
longer be considered to be a Strategic Allocation and you may no longer trade into a Strategic Allocation. Any active asset rebalancing or dollar cost averaging programs will continue according
to your current allocations on file.
Allocations (effective February 6, 2017)
| Variable Portfolios |
Allocation 1 |
Allocation 2 |
Allocation 3 |
| Fidelity VIP Contrafund |
0.99% |
1.32% |
1.98% |
| Fidelity VIP Equity-Income |
2.64% |
2.97% |
3.30% |
| Fidelity VIP Investment Grade Bond |
15.51% |
10.56% |
6.93% |
| Fidelity VIP Mid Cap |
3.96% |
5.61% |
6.27% |
| Fidelity VIP Overseas |
1.98% |
2.64% |
3.30% |
| SA Allocation Balanced |
67.00% |
0.00% |
0.00% |
| SA Allocation Moderate |
0.00% |
67.00% |
0.00% |
| SA Allocation Moderately Aggressive |
0.00% |
0.00% |
67.00% |
| SA American Funds Global Growth |
1.98% |
2.31% |
2.64% |
| SA American Funds Growth |
0.66% |
0.99% |
1.32% |
| SA American Funds Growth-Income |
1.32% |
1.65% |
1.98% |
| T. Rowe Price Blue Chip Growth II |
0.99% |
1.32% |
1.32% |
| T. Rowe Price Equity Income II |
2.97% |
3.63% |
3.96% |
| Total |
100% |
100% |
100% |
A-7
Appendix B – Death Benefits following Spousal Continuation
The following details the standard and Maximum Anniversary Value death benefits, and the EstatePlus death benefit payable upon the Continuing
Spouse’s death. The death benefit we will pay to the new Beneficiary chosen by
the Continuing Spouse varies depending on the death benefit option elected by the
original Owner of the contract, whether Living Benefits were elected, the age of the
Continuing Spouse as of the Continuation Date and the Continuing Spouse’s date of
death.
Capitalized terms used in this Appendix have the same meaning as they have in the prospectus.
We define “Continuation Net Purchase Payments” as Net Purchase Payments made on or after
the Continuation Date. For the purpose of calculating Continuation Net Purchase
Payments, the amount that equals the contract value on the Continuation Date, including
the Continuation Contribution, is considered a Purchase Payment. We define “Continuation Purchase Payments” as Purchase Payments made on or after the Continuation Date.
The term “withdrawals” as used in describing the death benefits is defined as
withdrawals and the fees and charges applicable to those
withdrawals.
The term “Withdrawal Adjustment” is used, if a Living Benefit had been elected, in
describing the way in which the amount of the death benefit will be adjusted for withdrawals depending on when the Continuing Spouse takes a withdrawal and the amount of the withdrawal. If
cumulative withdrawals for the current contract year are taken prior to the Continuing
Spouse’s 81st birthday and are less than or equal to the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, the amount of adjustment will equal the amount of each withdrawal. If a withdrawal is taken prior to the
Continuing Spouse’s 81st birthday and cumulative withdrawals for the current
contract year are in excess of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, the contract value and the death benefit are first reduced by the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount. The resulting death benefit is
further adjusted by the withdrawal amount in excess of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal
Amount by the percentage by which the excess withdrawal reduced the resulting contract
value. If a withdrawal is taken on or after the Continuing Spouse’s 81st
birthday, the amount of adjustment is determined by the percentage by which the withdrawal reduced the contract value.
The Company will not accept Purchase Payments from anyone age 86 or older. Therefore, the death benefit calculations
described below assume that no Purchase Payments are received on or after the Continuing Spouse’s 86th birthday.
The standard death benefit and the optional Maximum Anniversary Value death benefit are calculated differently depending on whether the original Owner
had elected one of the Living Benefits, described above.
We will not
accept subsequent Purchase Payments on or after the 5th contract anniversary from your contract issue date if you have elected a Living Benefit feature.
The following is a description of the standard death benefit option following Spousal Continuation for contracts issued between August 2, 2004 and December 28, 2006.
If the original Owner of the contract elected the standard death benefit and the Continuing Spouse is age 82 or younger on the Continuation Date, then upon the
death of the Continuing Spouse, the death benefit will be the greater of:
a.
Contract value; or
b.
Contract value on the Continuation Date plus any Continuation Net Purchase Payments received prior to the Continuing Spouse’s 86th
birthday.
If the Continuing Spouse is age 83-85 on the Continuation Date, the death benefit will be greater of:
a.
Contract value; or
b.
The lesser of:
(1)
Contract value on the Continuation Date plus Continuation Net Purchase Payments received prior to the Continuing Spouse’s 86th birthday;
or
(2)
125% of the contract value.
If the Continuing Spouse is age 86 and older on the Continuation
Date, the death benefit is equal to the contract value.
The following is a
description of the standard death benefit option following Spousal Continuation for contracts issued between October 16, 2000 and August 2, 2004.
If the Standard Death Benefit is applicable upon the Continuing Spouse’s death and the Continuing Spouse is age 74 or younger at the time of death,
we will pay the Beneficiary the greater of:
1.
Contract value; or
2.
Continuation Net Purchase Payments compounded at a 3% annual growth rate until the date of death, plus any Continuation Net Purchase Payments recorded after the date of death.
If the Continuing
Spouse is age 75 or older at the time of death, the Standard Death Benefit is the greater of:
1.
Contract value; or
2.
Continuation Net Purchase Payments compounded at a 3% annual growth until the Continuing Spouse’s 75th birthday, plus any Continuation Net
Purchase Payments recorded after age 75 until the date of death.
B-1
The following is a description of the Maximum Anniversary Value death benefit option following Spousal Continuation for contracts issued between August 2, 2004 and December 28, 2006.
If the Continuing Spouse is age 82 or younger on the Continuation Date, the death benefit will be the greatest of:
a.
Contract value; or
b.
Continuation Net Purchase Payments; or
c.
Maximum anniversary value on any contract anniversary that occurred after the Continuation Date, but prior to the Continuing Spouse’s
83rd birthday. The anniversary value for any year is equal to the contract value on the
applicable contract anniversary date after the Continuation Date, reduced for
withdrawals since that contract anniversary in the same proportion that the contract
value was reduced on the date of such withdrawal, and adjusted for any Continuation
Purchase Payments received since that anniversary date.
If the Continuing Spouse is age 83-85 on the Continuation Date,
the death benefit will be the Standard Death Benefit described above and the fee for the Maximum Anniversary Value option will no longer be deducted as of the Continuation Date.
If the Continuing Spouse is age 86 and older on the Continuation Date, the death benefit is equal to
contract value and the fee for the Maximum Anniversary Value option will no longer be
deducted as of the Continuation Date.
If your contract was issued between August
2, 2004 and December 28, 2006, and if the Continuing
Spouse is age 90 or older at the time of death, the death benefit is equal to contract
value.
The following is a description of the Maximum Anniversary Value death benefit option following Spousal Continuation for contracts issued between October 16, 2000 and August 2, 2004.
If the Maximum Anniversary Value option is selected and if the Continuing Spouse is younger than age 90 at the time of death and a Continuation Contribution
was made, the death benefit is the greater of:
1.
Contract value; or
2.
Continuation Net Purchase Payments; or
3.
Maximum anniversary value on any contract anniversary occurring after the Continuation Date but prior to the Continuing Spouse’s 81st
birthday. The anniversary value equals the value on the contract anniversary plus any
Continuation Purchase Payments recorded after that anniversary; and reduced for any
withdrawals (and fees and charges
applicable to those withdrawals) recorded after that anniversary, in the same proportion that the withdrawal reduced the contract value on the date of
the withdrawal.
If the Maximum Anniversary Value option is selected and no Continuation Contribution was made the death benefit is the greater of:
1.
Contract value; or
2.
Net Purchase Payments; or
3.
Maximum anniversary value on any contract anniversary occurring after the issue date but before the Continuing Spouse’s 81st birthday.
The anniversary value equals the value on the contract anniversary plus any Purchase
Payments recorded after that anniversary; and reduced for any withdrawals (and fees and
charges applicable to those withdrawals) recorded after that anniversary, in the same
proportion that the withdrawal reduced the contract value on the date of the withdrawal.
If the Continuing Spouse is age 90 or older at the time of death
and the Maximum Anniversary Value option applied, the death benefit will be equal to the contract value at the time we receive all required paperwork and satisfactory proof of death. The Continuing
Spouse’s Beneficiary will not receive any benefit from the optional enhanced death
benefit. However, the Continuing Spouse’s Beneficiary may still receive a benefit
from Earnings Advantage if the date of death is prior to the Latest Annuity Date.
The following is a description of the
Purchase Payment Accumulation death benefit option for contracts issued between August 2, 2004 and December 28, 2006.
If the Continuing Spouse is age 74 or younger on the
Continuation Date, the death benefit will be the greatest of:
1.
Contract value; or
2.
Contract value on the Continuation Date plus Continuation Net Purchase Payments, compounded at 3% annual growth rate, to the earlier of the
Continuing Spouse’s 75th birthday or date of death; plus any Continuation Net
Purchase Payment received after the Continuing Spouse’s 75th birthday to the
earlier of the Continuing Spouse’s 86th birthday or date of death; or
3.
Contract value on the seventh contract anniversary, reduced for withdrawals since the seventh contract anniversary in the same proportion that the
contract value was reduced on the date of each such withdrawal that occurs after the
seventh contract anniversary, plus Continuation Net Purchase Payments received between
the seventh contract anniversary date but prior to the Continuing Spouse’s 86th birthday.
B-2
If the Continuing
Spouse is age 75-82 on the Continuation Date and the Continuing Spouse dies prior to his/her 86th birthday, then the death benefit will be the greatest of:
1.
Contract value; or
2.
Contract value on the Continuation Date plus any Continuation Net Purchase Payments received prior to the Continuing Spouse’s 86th birthday;
or
3.
Maximum anniversary value on any contract anniversary that occurred after the Continuation Date, but prior to the Continuing Spouse’s
83rd birthday. The anniversary value for any year is equal to the contract value on the
applicable contract anniversary date, plus any Continuation Net Purchase Payments
received since that anniversary date but prior to the Continuing Spouse’s 86th
birthday, and reduced for any Gross Withdrawals since that contract anniversary in the
same proportion that the withdrawal reduced the contract value on the date of such
withdrawal.
If the Continuing Spouse is age 83-85 on the Continuation Date, the death benefit will be the Standard Death Benefit described above and the fee for the
Purchase Payment Accumulation option will no longer be deducted as of the Continuation
Date. If the Continuing Spouse is age 86 or older on the Continuation Date, the death benefit is equal to the contract value.
The following is a description of the 5%
Accumulation death benefit option for contracts issued prior to August 2, 2004.
If the 5% Accumulation option is selected and a Continuation Contribution was made the death benefit is the greater of:
1.
Contract value; or
2.
Continuation Net Purchase Payments made from the Continuation Date including the Continuation Contribution, compounded to the earlier of the Continuing Spouse’s 80th birthday or the date of death at a 5% annual growth rate, plus any
Continuation Purchase Payments recorded after the 80th birthday or the date of death;
and reduced for any withdrawals recorded after the 80th birthday or the date of death,
in the same proportion that the withdrawal reduced the contract value on the date of
the withdrawal, up to a maximum benefit of two times the Continuation Net Purchase
Payments.
If 5% Accumulation option is selected and no Continuation Contribution was made:
1.
Contract value; or
2.
Net Purchase Payments made from the date of issue compounded to the earlier of the Continuing Spouse’s 80th birthday or the date of death at a
5% annual growth rate, plus any Continuation Purchase Payments recorded after the 80th
birthday or the date of death; and reduced for any withdrawals
recorded after the 80th birthday or the date of death, in the same proportion that the withdrawal reduced the contract value on the date of the
withdrawal, up to a maximum of two times the Continuation Net Purchase Payments.
If the Continuing Spouse dies after the Latest Annuity Date and the 5% Accumulation option applied,
any death benefit payable under the contract will be the Standard Death Benefit as
described above. The Continuing Spouse’s Beneficiary will not receive any benefit from the 5% Accumulation option.
C. The EstatePlus Benefit Payable Upon Continuing
Spouse’s Death:
Spouse’s Death:
The EstatePlus (“Earnings Advantage” for contracts issued
prior to August 2, 2004) benefit is only available if the original Owner elected
EstatePlus and the Continuing Spouse is age 80 or younger on the Continuation Date.
EstatePlus benefit is not payable after the Latest Annuity Date.
If the Continuing Spouse had earnings in the contract at the time of his/her death, we will add a
percentage of those earnings (the “EstatePlus Percentage” or “Earnings
Advantage Percentage” for contracts issued prior to August 2, 2004), subject to a
maximum dollar amount (the “Maximum EstatePlus Percentage” or “Maximum Earnings Advantage Percentage” for contracts issued prior to August 2, 2004), to the death benefit payable. The
contract year of death will determine the EstatePlus Percentage and the Maximum
EstatePlus Benefit. The EstatePlus benefit, if any, is added to the death benefit
payable under the Maximum Anniversary Value or Purchase Payment Accumulation death benefit options.
On the Continuation Date, if the Continuing Spouse is 69 or younger, the table below shows the available EstatePlus benefit:
| Contract Year
of Death |
EstatePlus
Percentage |
Maximum
EstatePlus Benefit |
| Years 0-4 |
25% of Earnings |
40% of Continuation Net
Purchase Payments*
(25% for contracts
issued prior to 8/2/04) |
| Years 5-9 |
40% of Earnings |
65% of Continuation Net
Purchase Payments*
(40% for contracts
issued prior to 8/2/04) |
| Years 10+ |
50% of Earnings |
75% of Continuation Net Purchase Payments* (50% for contracts issued prior to 8/2/04) |
B-3
On the Continuation
Date, if the Continuing Spouse is between his/her 70th and 81st birthdays, table below shows the available EstatePlus benefit:
| Contract Year
of Death |
EstatePlus
Percentage |
Maximum
EstatePlus Benefit |
| All Contract
Years |
25% of Earnings |
40% of Continuation Net Purchase Payments* |
*
Purchase Payments received after the 5th anniversary of the Continuation Date must remain in the contract for at least 6 full months to be included as part of the
Continuation Net Purchase Payments for the purpose of the Maximum EstatePlus Benefit
calculation.
What is the Contract Year of Death?
Contract Year of Death is the number of full 12-month periods starting on the Continuation Date and
ending on the Continuing Spouse’s date of death. The Contract Year of Death is
used to determine the EstatePlus Percentage and Maximum EstatePlus benefit as indicated in the tables above.
What is the EstatePlus benefit?
We determine the EstatePlus benefit using the EstatePlus Percentage, as indicated in the tables above, which is a specified percentage of the earnings in the
contract at the time of the Continuing Spouse’s death. For the purpose of this
calculation, earnings equals (1) minus (2) where
(1)
equals the contract value on the Continuing Spouse’s date of death;
(2)
equals the Continuation Net Purchase Payment(s).
What is
the Maximum EstatePlus amount?
The EstatePlus benefit is subject to a maximum dollar amount. The
Maximum EstatePlus benefit is equal to a specified percentage of the Continuation Net Purchase Payments, as indicated in the tables above.
We reserve the right to modify, suspend or terminate the Spousal Continuation provision (in its entirety or any
component) at any time with respect to prospectively issued contracts.
B-4
Appendix C – State Contract Availability and/or Variability
| PROSPECTUS PROVISION |
AVAILABILITY OR VARIATION |
STATES |
| Administration Charge |
Contract Maintenance Fee is $30. |
North Dakota |
| Administration Charge |
Charge will be deducted pro-rata from Variable Portfolios
only. |
Washington |
| Annuity Date |
You may switch to the Income Phase any time after your first contract
anniversary. |
Florida |
| Death Benefits |
The standard death benefit is only available to contract owners or
continuing spouses who are age 82 and
younger. |
Washington |
| Death Benefits |
The and EstatePlus death benefit is not available. |
Washington |
| Death Benefits Upon Spousal Continuation |
If you continue your contract on or after your 83rd birthday, the
death benefit is equal to contract value.
|
Washington |
| MarketLock
MarketLock For Two |
Charge will be deducted pro-rata from Variable Portfolios
only. |
Oregon
Texas
Washington |
| Seasons Income Rewards
Season Promise |
Charge will be deducted pro-rata from Variable Portfolios
only. |
Washington |
| Systematic Withdrawal |
Minimum withdrawal amount is $250 per withdrawal or the penalty free
withdrawal amount. |
Minnesota
Oregon |
| Transfer Privilege |
Any transfer over the limit of 15 will incur a $10 transfer
fee. |
Pennsylvania
Texas |
| Withdrawal Charge Schedule |
For contracts issued prior to November 17, 2003, the withdrawal charge
schedule is as follows: 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, 0%. This
schedule only applies if you elected a DCA Fixed Account. |
Oregon |
C-1
Appendix D – The Guarantee for Contracts Issued Prior to December 29, 2006
GUARANTEE OF INSURANCE OBLIGATIONS
The Company’s insurance policy obligations for
individual and group contracts issued by SunAmerica Annuity prior to December 29, 2006 at 4:00 p.m. Eastern Time, are guaranteed (the “Guarantee”) by
American Home Assurance Company (“American Home” or “Guarantor”).
As of December 29, 2006 at 4:00 p.m. Eastern Time (the “Point of Termination”), the Guarantee by American Home was terminated for prospectively issued contracts. The Guarantee will not cover any contracts or certificates with a date of issue later than the Point of Termination. The Guarantee will continue to cover individual contracts, individual certificates and group unallocated contracts with a date of issue earlier than the Point of Termination until all insurance obligations under such contracts or certificates are satisfied in full. Insurance obligations include, without limitation, contract value invested in any available Fixed Accounts, death benefits, Living Benefits and annuity income options. The Guarantee does not guarantee contract value or the investment performance of the Variable Portfolios available under the contracts. The Guarantee provides that individual contract owners, individual certificate holders and group unallocated contract owners with a date of issue earlier than the Point of Termination can enforce the Guarantee directly.
American Home is a stock property-casualty insurance company
incorporated under the laws of the State of New York on February 7, 1899. American Home’s principal executive office is located at 1271 Avenue of the Americas,
FL37, New York, NY 10020-1304. American Home is licensed in all 50 states of the United States and the District of Columbia, as well as certain foreign jurisdictions, and engages in a broad range of insurance and reinsurance activities. American Home is an indirect wholly-owned subsidiary of American International Group, Inc.
D-1
Appendix E – Optional Living BENEFIT EXAMPLES
The following examples demonstrate how market performance, subsequent Purchase Payments, and withdrawals impact the Seasons Promise Living Benefit, and how the final benefit is determined.
The examples are based on a hypothetical contract over an extended period of time and do not assume any specific rate of return nor do they represent how your contract will actually perform.
Examples 1 through 4 below assume election of
the Seasons Promise Living Benefit.
Example 1: Initial Values
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Owner age 65 on the Issue Date
| Values as of |
Contract
Value Before |
Purchase
Payment
Invested |
Contract
Value After |
Benefit
Base |
| Issue Date |
$0 |
$100,000 |
$100,000 |
$100,000 |
Benefit Base is the initial Purchase Payment of $100,000.
Example 2: Impact of Adding Subsequent Purchase Payments
The values shown below are based on the assumptions stated in Example 1 above, in addition to the following:
•
Subsequent Purchase Payment invested in the first 90 days = $50,000.
•
No withdrawals taken in the first Contract Year.
| Values as of |
Assumed
Contract
Value Before |
Purchase
Payment
Invested |
Contract
Value After |
Benefit
Base |
| Contract Date |
$0 |
$100,000 |
$100,000 |
$100,000 |
| Year 1 – Day 80 |
$105,000 |
$50,000 |
$155,000 |
$150,000 |
| 1st Anniversary |
$160,000 |
|
$160,000 |
$150,000 |
The subsequent Purchase Payments made in the 1st 90 days increased the Benefit Base.
Example 3: Impact of withdrawals on Benefit Base
The values shown below are based on the assumptions stated in Examples
1 and 2 above, in addition to the following:
•
A withdrawal of $17,000 was taken in the third Contract Year.
| Values as of |
Assumed
Contract
Value Before |
Withdrawal
Taken |
Contract
Value After |
Benefit
Base |
| 2nd Anniversary |
$168,000 |
– |
$168,000 |
$150,000 |
| Year 3 – Day 100 |
$170,000 |
$17,000 |
$153,000 |
$135,000 |
| 3rd Anniversary |
$144,000 |
– |
$144,000 |
$135,000 |
•
Benefit Base reduced in the same proportion by which the contract value is
reduced by the withdrawal amount.
○
In year 3 – day 100, the proportionate reduction was 10%
($17,000/$170,000); the reduced Benefit Base was $135,000 ($150,000 x (1 – 10%)).
E-1
Example 4:
Benefit Date Evaluation.
The values shown below are based on the assumptions stated in Example 3 above, in addition to the following:
•
No withdrawals or subsequent Purchase Payments are made.
| Values as of |
Assumed
Contract
Value Before |
Benefit
Base |
Contract
Value After |
| 4th Anniversary |
$178,000 |
$135,000 |
|
| 5th Anniversary |
$190,000 |
$135,000 |
|
| 6th Anniversary |
$150,000 |
$135,000 |
|
| 7th Anniversary |
$146,000 |
$135,000 |
|
| 8th Anniversary |
$130,000 |
$135,000 |
|
| 9th Anniversary |
$120,000 |
$135,000 |
|
| 10th Anniversary |
$110,000 |
$135,000 |
$135,000 |
•
At the Benefit Date of the 10th contract anniversary, a comparison is performed
between the Contract Value and the Benefit Base. The Benefit Base of $135,000 is greater than the Contract Value of $110,000. So, the difference of $25,000 is added to the Contract Value as earnings. The Contract Value through the Seasons Promise feature evaluation increases to $135,000.
•
This ends the Seasons Promise living benefit feature.
Examples 5 through
9 below assume election of the Income Protector Living
Benefit.
Example 5: Initial Values
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
| Values as of |
Contract
Value Before |
Purchase
Payment
Invested |
Contract
Value After |
Income Benefit
Base |
| Issue Date |
$0 |
$100,000 |
$100,000 |
$100,000 |
Income Benefit Base is the initial Purchase Payment of $100,000.
Example 6: Impact of Adding Subsequent Purchase
Payments
The values shown below are based on the assumptions stated in Example 5 above, in addition to the following:
•
Subsequent Purchase Payment invested on day 80 of $50,000.
•
No withdrawals taken in the first Contract Year.
| Values as of |
Assumed Contract Value
Before |
Purchase Payment
Invested |
Contract Value After |
Income Benefit Base |
| Contract Date |
$0 |
$100,000 |
$100,000 |
$100,000 |
| Year 1 – Day 80 |
$105,000 |
$50,000 |
$155,000 |
$150,000 |
| 1st Anniversary |
$160,000 |
- |
$160,000 |
$150,000 |
The subsequent Purchase Payment made on day 80 increased the Income Benefit
Base.
E-2
Example 7:
Impact of withdrawals on Income Benefit Base
The values shown below are based on the assumptions stated in Examples 5 and 6 above, in addition to the following:
•
A withdrawal of $17,000 was taken in the third Contract Year.
| Values as of |
Assumed
Contract
Value Before |
Withdrawal
Taken |
Contract
Value After |
Income Benefit
Base |
| 2nd Anniversary |
$168,000 |
– |
$168,000 |
$150,000 |
| Year 3 – Day 100 |
$170,000 |
$17,000 |
$153,000 |
$135,000 |
| 3rd Anniversary |
$144,000 |
– |
$144,000 |
$135,000 |
•
Income Benefit Base reduced in the same proportion by which the contract value is
reduced by the withdrawal amount.
○
In year 3 – day 100, the proportionate reduction was 10% ($17,000/$170,000); the reduced Income Benefit Base was $135,000 ($150,000 x (1 – 10%)).
Example
8: The Final Income Benefit Based at the Income Benefit Date
The values shown below are based on the assumptions stated in Example 7
above, in addition to the following:
•
No withdrawals or subsequent Purchase Payments are made up to the Income Benefit
Date.
•
No premium tax or any charges on and after the Income Benefit Date.
| Values as of |
Assumed Contract Value |
Income Benefit Base |
Final Income Benefit Base |
| 4th Anniversary |
$178,000 |
$135,000 |
– |
| 5th Anniversary |
$190,000 |
$135,000 |
– |
| 6th Anniversary |
$150,000 |
$135,000 |
– |
| 7th Anniversary |
$146,000 |
$135,000 |
– |
| 8th Anniversary |
$130,000 |
$135,000 |
– |
| 9th Anniversary |
$120,000 |
$135,000 |
$135,000 |
•
At the Income Benefit Date of the 9th Contract Anniversary, the Income Benefit
Base remains $135,000; the Contract Value is $120,000.
Example 9: How the Income Payments are Determined
The values shown below are based on the assumptions stated in Example
8 above, in addition to the following:
•
Assume Annuitant elects to receive income payments on a Contract Anniversary,
using the Income Protector feature of $135,000, rather than the Contract Value.
•
Assume Annuitant’s Attained age is 70 at the Annuitization date, of both
the single and joint scenarios.
| |
Monthly Annuity Factor |
Annual Annuity Payment |
| Male Age 70* |
5.56 |
$9,007 |
| Female Age 70* |
4.90 |
$7,938 |
| Joint** Male 70
Female 70 |
4.19 |
$6,788 |
*
For Life Annuity with 10 Years Guaranteed
**
For Joint and Survivor Life Annuity with 20 Years Guaranteed
E-3
Appendix F – Death BENEFIT EXAMPLES
The following examples assume your contract was issued between August 2, 2004 and December 28, 2006, and demonstrate how market performance, subsequent Purchase Payments, and withdrawals impact the death benefit.
The examples are based on a hypothetical contract over an extended period of time and do not assume any specific rate of return nor do they represent how your contract will actually perform.
Examples 1 through 3 below assume election of the
Standard Death Benefit without a Living Benefit.
Example 1: Initial Values
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Owner age 65 on the Issue Date
| Values as of |
Purchase
Payment
Invested |
Contract
Value |
Net Purchase Payments |
Standard Death Benefit |
| Issue Date |
$100,000 |
$100,000 |
$100,000 |
$100,000 |
Example 2: Impact of Adding Subsequent Purchase Payments
The values shown below are based on the assumptions
stated in Example 1 above, in addition to the following:
•
Subsequent Purchase Payment invested in the first Contract Year = $60,000.
•
Subsequent Purchase Payment invested in the second Contract Year =
$90,000.
•
No withdrawals taken in the first two Contract Years.
| Values as of |
Purchase
Payment
Invested |
Assumed Contract
Value |
Net Purchase Payments |
Standard Death Benefit |
| Contract Date |
$100,000 |
$100,000 |
$100,000 |
$100,000 |
| Year 1 |
$60,000 |
$165,000 |
$160,000 |
$165,000 |
| 1st Anniversary |
– |
$155,000 |
$160,000 |
$160,000 |
| Year 2 |
$90,000 |
$245,000 |
$250,000 |
$250,000 |
| 2nd Anniversary |
– |
$260,000 |
$250,000 |
$260,000 |
The values of the death benefit are impacted by adding subsequent Purchase Payments and the Contract Value at the time the death benefit is being calculated.
•
The Net Purchase Payments are recalculated at the time each subsequent Purchase
Payment is received.
Example 3: Impact of Withdrawals on Net Purchase Payments
The values shown below are based on the assumptions stated in Examples 1 and 2 above, in addition to the following:
•
A withdrawal of $15,000 was taken in the third Contract Year.
•
A withdrawal of $23,000 was taken in the fourth Contract Year.
| Values as of |
Assumed Contract
Value |
Withdrawal Taken |
Contract Value After
Withdrawal |
Net Purchase
Payments |
Standard Death
Benefit |
| Year 3 |
$300,000 |
$15,000 |
$285,000 |
$237,500 |
$285,000 |
| 3rd Anniversary |
$265,000 |
– |
$265,000 |
$237,500 |
$265,000 |
| Year 4 |
$230,000 |
$23,000 |
$207,000 |
$213,750 |
$213,750 |
| 4th Anniversary |
$220,000 |
– |
$220,000 |
$213,750 |
$220,000 |
•
The Net Purchase Payments are reduced in the same proportion by which the
Contract Value is reduced by the withdrawal amount.
○
In year 3, the proportionate reduction was 5.0% ($15,000/$300,000); the reduced Net Purchase Payments were $237,500 [$250,000 x (1 - 5.0%)]. The Standard Death Benefit was $285,000.
F-1
○
In year 4, the proportionate reduction was 10.0% ($23,000/$230,000); the reduced Net Purchase Payments were $213,750 [$237,500 x (1 - 10.0%)]. The Standard Death Benefit was $213,750.
Note: In year 3 the proportionate reduction of 5.0% has less of an impact to the Net Purchase Payments because the Contract Value was greater than the Net Purchase Payments: The $15,000 withdrawal reduced the Net Purchase Payments by $12,500. Compared to year 4, the proportionate reduction of 10.0% has a higher impact because the Contract Value was less than the Net Purchase Payments: The $23,000 withdrawal reduced Net Purchase Payments by $23,750.
Examples 4 through 6 below assume election of Maximum Anniversary Value Death
Benefit and optional Estate Plus without a Living Benefit.
Example 4: Initial Values
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Owner age 65 on the Issue Date
| Values as of |
Purchase
Payment
Invested |
Contract
Value |
Net Purchase Payments |
Maximum Anniversary
Value Death Benefit |
| Issue Date |
$100,000 |
$100,000 |
$100,000 |
$100,000 |
Example 5: Impact of Adding Subsequent Purchase Payments
The values shown below are based on the assumptions
stated in Example 4 above, in addition to the following:
•
Subsequent Purchase Payment invested in the first Contract Year = $60,000.
•
Subsequent Purchase Payment invested in the second Contract Year =
$90,000.
•
No withdrawals taken in the first two Contract Years.
| Values as of |
Purchase
Payment
Invested |
Assumed
Contract Value |
Anniversary
Value |
Net Purchase
Payments |
Maximum
Anniversary
Value |
Maximum
Anniversary
Value Death
Benefit |
| Issue Date |
$100,000 |
$100,000 |
– |
$100,000 |
– |
$100,000 |
| Year 1 |
$60,000 |
$165,000 |
– |
$160,000 |
– |
$165,000 |
| 1st Anniversary |
– |
$155,000 |
$155,000 |
$160,000 |
$155,000 |
$160,000 |
| Year 2 |
$90,000 |
$245,000 |
– |
$250,000 |
$245,000 |
$250,000 |
| 2nd Anniversary |
– |
$260,000 |
$260,000 |
$250,000 |
$260,000 |
$260,000 |
The values of the death benefit are impacted by adding subsequent Purchase Payments and locking in the higher Anniversary Values as follows:
•
The Net Purchase Payments and Maximum Anniversary Value (“MAV”) Death
Benefit are recalculated at the time each subsequent Purchase Payment is received.
○
In year 1, the $60,000 subsequent Purchase Payment increased the Net Purchase
Payments, however the Contract Value was greater; the Maximum Anniversary Value Death Benefit was $165,000.
○
At 1st anniversary, the Maximum Anniversary Value is set to the Anniversary
Value of $155,000; the Net Purchase Payments were $160,000; the Maximum Anniversary Value Death Benefit was $160,000.
•
The Maximum Anniversary Value is increased to a Higher Anniversary Value on each
Benefit Year Anniversary if the Anniversary Value is greater than the current Maximum Anniversary Value.
○
In year 2, the $90,000 subsequent Purchase Payment increased the Net Purchase
Payments to $250,000 and Maximum Anniversary Value to $245,000; the Maximum Anniversary Value Death Benefit was $250,000.
○
At 2nd anniversary, the Maximum Anniversary Value is set to the Anniversary
Value of $260,000; the Net Purchase Payments were $250,000; the Maximum Anniversary Value Death Benefit was $260,000.
•
Estate Plus would provide an Earnings Enhancement when Contract Value is greater
than the Net Purchase Payments. If death were to occur at any of the following the Earnings Enhancement would be:
○
Year 1: $1,250 [($165,000 - $160,000) x 25%]
○
1st Anniversary: $0 [Contract Value ($155,000) is less than the Net Purchase
Payments ($160,000)]
F-2
○
Year 2: $0 [Contract Value ($245,000) is less than the Net Purchase Payments
($250,000)]
○
2nd Anniversary: $2,500 [($260,000 - $250,000) x 25%]
Example 6: Impact of Withdrawals on Net Purchase Payments and Maximum Anniversary Value
The values shown below are based on the assumptions stated in Examples 4 and 5 above, in addition to the following:
•
A withdrawal of $15,000 was taken in the third Contract Year.
•
A withdrawal of $23,000 was taken in the fourth Contract Year.
| Values as of |
Assumed
Contract
Value |
Withdrawal
Taken |
Anniversary
Value |
Net Purchase
Payments |
Maximum
Anniversary
Value |
Maximum
Anniversary
Value Death
Benefit |
Estate Plus |
| 2nd Anniversary |
$260,000 |
– |
$260,000 |
$250,000 |
$260,000 |
$260,000 |
$2,500 |
| Year 3 |
$300,000 |
$15,000 |
– |
$237,500 |
$247,000 |
$285,000 |
$11,875 |
| 3rd Anniversary |
$265,000 |
– |
$265,000 |
$237,500 |
$265,000 |
$265,000 |
$6,875 |
| Year 4 |
$230,000 |
$23,000 |
– |
$213,750 |
$238,500 |
$238,500 |
$0 |
| 4th Anniversary |
$220,000 |
– |
$220,000 |
$213,750 |
$238,500 |
$238,500 |
$1,563 |
•
The Net Purchase Payments and Maximum Anniversary Value are reduced in the same
proportion by which the Contract Value is reduced by the withdrawal amount.
○
In year 3, the proportionate reduction was 5.0% ($15,000/$300,000); the reduced
Net Purchase Payments were $237,500 [$250,000 x (1 - 5.0%)]. The Maximum Anniversary Value Death Benefit was $285,000 ($300,000 - $15,000).
○
In year 4, the proportionate reduction was 10.0% ($23,000/$230,000); the reduced Net Purchase Payments were $213,750 [$237,500 x (1 - 10.0%)]. The Maximum Anniversary Value Death Benefit was $238,500.
Note: In year 3 the proportionate reduction of 5.0% has less impact to the Maximum Anniversary Value because Contract Value was greater than Maximum Anniversary Value: The $15,000 withdrawal reduced Maximum Anniversary Value by $13,000. Compared to year 4, the proportionate reduction of 10.0% has a higher impact because Contract Value was less than the Maximum Anniversary Value: The $23,000 withdrawal reduced Maximum Anniversary Value by $26,500.
•
Estate Plus would provide an Earnings Enhancement when Contract Value is greater
than the Net Purchase Payments. If death were to occur at any of the following the Earnings Enhancement would be:
○
Year 3: $11,875 [($285,000 - $237,500) x 25%]
○
3rd Anniversary: $6,875 [($265,000 - $237,500) x 25%]
○
Year 4: $0 [Contract Value ($207,000) is less than the Net Purchase Payments
($213,750)]
○
4th Anniversary: $1,563 [($222,000 - $213,750) x 25%]
F-3
The Statement of
Additional Information (SAI) contains additional information about the contract, the Company, and the Separate Account, including financial statements. The SAI is dated
the same date as this prospectus, and the SAI is incorporated by reference into this prospectus. You may request a free copy of the SAI or submit inquiries by:
•
Mailing: Annuity Service Center, P.O. Box 15570, Amarillo, Texas
79105-5570
•
Calling: (855) 421-2692
•
Visiting: www.corebridgefinancial.com/ProductProspectuses
You may also
obtain other information about the Separate Account on the SEC’s website at www.sec.gov, and copies of this information may be obtained, upon payment of a duplicating fee, by electronic
request at the following email address: [email protected].
EDGAR Contract Identifier: C000124678
STATEMENT OF ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
FLEXIBLE PREMIUM DEFERRED VARIABLE ANNUITY
CONTRACT
ISSUED BY
AMERICAN GENERAL LIFE INSURANCE COMPANY
IN CONNECTION WITH
VARIABLE ANNUITY ACCOUNT FIVE
SEASONS SELECT II VARIABLE ANNUITY
This Statement of Additional Information is not a prospectus; it should be read with the prospectus, dated May 1, 2026, relating to the annuity contracts described above. A copy of the prospectus may be obtained without charge by calling (855) 421-2692, visiting www.corebridgefinancial.com/ProductProspectuses, or writing us at:
AMERICAN GENERAL LIFE INSURANCE COMPANY
ANNUITY SERVICE CENTER
P.O. BOX 15570
AMARILLO, TEXAS 79105-5570
ANNUITY SERVICE CENTER
P.O. BOX 15570
AMARILLO, TEXAS 79105-5570
May 1, 2026
Separate Account and the Company
American General Life Insurance Company (“AGL” or the “Company”) is a stock life insurance company organized under the laws of the State of Texas on April 11, 1960. AGL is an indirect, wholly owned subsidiary of Corebridge Financial, Inc. (“Corebridge”). On March 26, 2026, Corebridge and Equitable Holdings, Inc., announced that they entered into a definitive
agreement to combine in an all-stock merger. Under the terms of the merger agreement, both companies will become wholly owned subsidiaries of a newly formed holding
company, which will be renamed “Equitable Holdings, Inc.” upon the closing of the transaction. The transaction is expected to close by year-end 2026, subject to certain regulatory approvals and other customary closing conditions. Upon completion of the transaction, AGL
will be an indirect wholly owned subsidiary of the new Equitable Holdings, Inc. AGL offers individual term and universal life insurance, as well as fixed, variable and registered index-linked annuities in all states except in New York.
On December 31, 2012, SunAmerica Annuity and Life Assurance Company (“SunAmerica Annuity”), American General Assurance Company (“AGAC”), American General Life and Accident Insurance Company (“AGLA”), American General Life Insurance Company of Delaware (“AGLD”), SunAmerica Life Insurance Company (“SALIC”) and Western National Life Insurance Company, (“WNL”), affiliates of American General Life Insurance Company, merged with and into American General Life Insurance Company (“Merger”). Prior to this date, the Seasons Select II contracts were issued by SunAmerica Annuity in all states except New York.
Variable Annuity Account Five (“Separate Account”) was originally established by Anchor National Life Insurance Company (“Anchor National”) on July 8, 1996 pursuant to the provisions of Arizona law, as a segregated asset account of Anchor National. Effective March 1, 2003, Anchor National changed its name to AIG SunAmerica Life Assurance Company (“SunAmerica Life”). Effective July 20, 2009, SunAmerica Life changed its name to SunAmerica Annuity and Life Assurance Company. These were name changes only and did not affect the substance of any contract. Prior to December 31, 2012, the Separate Account was a separate account of SunAmerica Annuity. On December 31, 2012, and in conjunction with the merger of AGL and SunAmerica Annuity, the Separate Account was transferred to and became a Separate Account of AGL under Texas law.
The Separate Account meets the definition of a “Separate Account” under the federal securities laws and is registered with the SEC as a unit investment trust under the Investment Company Act of 1940. This registration does not involve supervision of the management of the Separate Account or the Company by the SEC.
The assets of the Separate Account are the property of the Company. However, the assets of the Separate Account, equal to its reserves and other contract liabilities, are not chargeable with liabilities arising out of any other business the Company may conduct. Income, gains, and losses, whether or not realized, from assets allocated to the Separate Account are credited to or charged against the Separate Account without regard to other income, gains, or losses of the Company.
The Separate Account is divided into Variable Portfolios, with the assets of
each Variable Portfolio invested in the shares of one of the Underlying Funds. The Company does not guarantee the investment performance of the Separate Account, its Variable Portfolios or the Underlying Funds. Values allocated to the Separate Account and the amount of variable annuity income payments will vary with the values of shares of the Underlying Funds, and are also reduced by contract charges and fees.
The basic objective of a variable annuity contract is to provide variable
annuity income payments which will be to some degree responsive to changes in the economic environment, including inflationary forces and changes in rates of return available from various types of investments. The contract is designed to seek to accomplish this objective by providing that variable annuity income payments will reflect the investment performance of the Separate Account with respect to amounts allocated to it both before and after the Annuity Date. Since the Separate Account is always fully invested in shares of the Underlying Funds, its investment performance reflects the investment performance of those entities. The values of such shares held by the Separate Account fluctuate and are subject to the risks of changing economic conditions as well as the risk inherent in the ability of the Underlying Funds’ management to make necessary changes in their funds to anticipate changes in economic conditions. Therefore, the owner bears the entire investment risk that the basic objectives of the contract may not be realized, and that the adverse effects of inflation may not be lessened. There can be no assurance that the aggregate amount of variable annuity income payments will equal or exceed the Purchase Payments made with respect to a particular account for the reasons described above, or because of the premature death of an Annuitant.
-3-
Another important
feature of the contract related to its basic objective is the Company’s promise that the dollar amount of variable annuity income payments made during the
lifetime of the Annuitant will not be adversely affected by the actual mortality experience of the Company or by the actual expenses incurred by the Company in excess
of expense deductions provided for in the contract (although the Company does not guarantee the amounts of the variable annuity income payments).
American Home Assurance Company
All references in this SAI to American Home Assurance Company (“American Home”) apply only to contracts issued prior to December 29, 2006 at 4:00 p.m. Eastern Time. American Home is a stock property-casualty insurance company incorporated under the laws of the State of New York on February 7, 1899. American Home’s principal executive office is located at 1271 Avenue of the Americas, FL37, New York, NY 10020-1304. American Home is licensed in all 50 states of the United States and the District of Columbia, as well as certain foreign jurisdictions, and engages in a broad range of insurance and reinsurance activities. American Home is an indirect wholly-owned subsidiary of American International Group, Inc.
Custodian
The Company acts as custodian of the Separate Account.
We have custody of all assets and cash of the Separate Account and handle the collection of proceeds of shares of the Underlying Funds bought and sold by the Separate
Account.
General Account
The general account is made up of all of the general
assets of the Company other than those allocated to the Separate Account or any other segregated asset account of the Company. A Purchase Payment may be allocated to
the fixed and/or DCA fixed account options of various available periods offered in connection with the general account, as elected by the owner purchasing a contract. The DCA fixed accounts are not available if the Seasons Reward Program is elected. Other fixed account options may be available to you. Please refer to your contract for additional information. Assets supporting amounts allocated to a fixed investment option become part of the Company’s general account assets and are available to fund the claims of all classes of customers of the Company, as well as of its creditors. Accordingly, all of the Company’s assets held in the general account will be available to fund the Company’s obligations under the contracts as well as such other claims.
The Company will invest the assets of the general account in the manner chosen by the Company and allowed by applicable state laws regarding the nature and quality of investments that may be made by life insurance companies and the percentage of their assets that may be committed to any particular type of investment. In general, these laws permit investments, within specified limits and subject to certain qualifications, in federal, state and municipal obligations, corporate bonds, preferred and common stocks, real estate mortgages, real estate and certain other investments.
-4-
Annuity Income
Payments
Initial Monthly Annuity Income Payments
The initial monthly annuity income payment is determined
by applying separately that portion of the contract value allocated to the fixed account options and the Variable Portfolio(s), less any premium tax if applicable, and
then applying it to the annuity table specified in the contract for fixed and variable annuity income payments. Those tables are based on a set amount per $1,000 of proceeds applied. The appropriate rate must be determined by the sex (except where, as in the case of certain Qualified contracts and other employer-sponsored retirement plans, such classification is not permitted) and age of the Annuitant and designated second person, if any, and the annuity income option selected.
The dollars applied are then divided by 1,000 and the result multiplied by
the appropriate annuity factor appearing in the table to compute the amount of the first monthly annuity income payment. In the case of a variable annuity, that amount is divided by the value of an Annuity Unit as of the Annuity Date to establish the number of Annuity Units representing each variable annuity income payment. The number of Annuity Units determined for the first monthly variable annuity income payment remains constant for the second and subsequent monthly variable annuity income payments, assuming that no reallocation of contract values is made.
Subsequent Monthly Annuity Income
Payments
For fixed annuity income payments, the amount of the second and each subsequent monthly fixed annuity income payment is the same as that determined above for the first fixed monthly annuity income payment.
For variable annuity income payments, the amount of the second and each subsequent monthly variable annuity income payment is determined by multiplying the number of Annuity Units, as determined in connection with the determination of the initial monthly variable annuity income payment, above, by the Annuity Unit value as of the day preceding the date on which each monthly variable annuity income payment is due.
Annuity Income Payments Under the Income Protector Program
If the Income Protector program is available and contract holders elect to begin annuity income payments using the Income Protector program, the income benefit base is determined as described in the prospectus. The initial annuity income payment is determined by applying the income benefit base to the annuity table specifically designated for use in conjunction with the Income Protector program, either in the contract or in the endorsement to the contract. Those tables are based on a set amount per $1,000 of income benefit base applied. The appropriate rate must be determined by the sex (except where, as in the case of certain Qualified contracts and other employer-sponsored retirement plans, such classification is not permitted), premium tax, if applicable, age of the Annuitant and designated second person, if any, and the annuity income option selected.
The income benefit base is applied then divided by 1,000 and the result
multiplied by the appropriate annuity factor appearing in the table to compute the amount of the first monthly annuity income payment. The amount of the second and each subsequent annuity income payment is the same as that determined above for the first monthly annuity income payment.
Annuity Unit Values
The value of an Annuity Unit is determined independently
for each Variable Portfolio.
The annuity tables contained in the contract are based on a 3.5% per annum assumed investment rate. If the actual net investment rate experienced by a Variable Portfolio exceeds 3.5%, variable annuity income payments derived from allocations to that Variable Portfolio will
increase over time. Conversely, if the actual rate is less than 3.5%, variable annuity income payments will decrease over time. If the net investment rate equals 3.5%, the variable annuity income payments will remain constant. If a higher assumed investment rate
had been used, the initial monthly variable annuity income payment would be higher, but the actual net investment rate would also have to be higher in order for variable annuity income payments to increase (or not to decrease).
The payee receives the value of a fixed number of Annuity Units each
month. The value of a fixed number of Annuity Units will reflect the investment performance of the Variable Portfolios elected, and the amount of each monthly variable annuity income payment will vary accordingly.
-5-
For each Variable
Portfolio, the value of an Annuity Unit is determined by multiplying the Annuity Unit value for the preceding month by the Net Investment Factor for the month for which
the Annuity Unit value is being calculated. The result is then multiplied by a second factor which offsets the effect of the assumed net investment rate of 3.5% per annum
which is assumed in the annuity tables contained in the contract.
Net Investment Factor
The Net Investment Factor (“NIF”) is an index applied to measure
the net investment performance of a Variable Portfolio from one day to the next. The NIF may be greater or less than or equal to one; therefore, the value of an Annuity Unit may increase, decrease or remain the same.
The NIF for any Variable Portfolio for a certain month is determined by
dividing (a) by (b) where:
(a)
is the Accumulation Unit value of the Variable Portfolio determined as of the end
of that month, and
(b)
is the Accumulation Unit value of the Variable Portfolio determined as of the end
of the preceding month.
The NIF for a Variable Portfolio for a given month is a measure of the net
investment performance of the Variable Portfolio from the end of the prior month to the end of the given month. A NIF of 1.000 results in no change; a NIF greater than 1.000 results in an increase; and a NIF less than 1.000 results in a decrease. The NIF is increased (or decreased) in accordance with the increases (or decreases, respectively) in the value of a share of the underlying fund in which the Variable Portfolio invests; it is also reduced by Separate Account asset charges.
Illustrative Example
Assume that one share of a given Variable Portfolio had an Accumulation Unit value of $11.46 as of the close of the New York Stock Exchange (“NYSE”) on the last business day in September; that its Accumulation Unit value had been $11.44 at the close of the NYSE on the last business day at the end of the previous month. The NIF for the month of September is:
| NIF
|
= |
($11.46/$11.44) |
| |
= |
1.00174825 |
The change in Annuity Unit value for a Variable Portfolio from one month to the next is determined in part by multiplying the Annuity Unit value at the prior month end by the NIF for that Variable Portfolio for the new month. In addition, however, the result of that computation must also be multiplied by an additional factor that takes into account, and neutralizes, the assumed investment rate of 3.5 percent per annum upon which the variable annuity income payment tables are based. For example, if the net investment rate for a Variable Portfolio (reflected in the NIF) were equal to the assumed investment rate, the variable annuity income payments should remain constant (i.e., the Annuity Unit value should not change). The monthly factor that neutralizes the assumed investment rate of 3.5 percent per annum is:
| |
|
(1/12) |
|
|
|
| 1/ |
[(1.035) |
|
] |
= |
0.99713732 |
In the example given above, if the Annuity Unit value for the Variable Portfolio was $10.103523 on the last business day in August, the Annuity Unit value on the last business day in September would have been:
$10.103523 x 1.00174825 x 0.99713732 = $10.092213
To determine the initial variable annuity income payment, the annuity income
payment for variable annuitization is calculated based on our mortality expectations and an assumed investment rate (AIR) of 3.5%. Thus the initial variable annuity income payment is the same as the initial payment for a fixed interest payout annuity calculated at an effective rate of 3.5%.
The NIF measures the performance of the funds that are basis for the amount
of future variable annuity income payments. This performance is compared to the monthly AIR, and if the rate of growth in the NIF is the same as the monthly AIR the payment remains the same as the prior month. If the rate of growth of the NIF is different than the AIR, then the payment is changed proportionately to the ratio NIF / (1+AIR), calculated on a monthly basis. If the NIF is less than the AIR, then this proportion is less than one and payments are decreased.
-6-
Variable Annuity Income Payments
Illustrative Example
Assume that a contract has all of its account value allocated to a single
Variable Portfolio. As of the last valuation preceding the Annuity Date, the account was credited with 7543.2456 Accumulation Units, each having a value of $15.432655 (i.e., the account value is equal to 7543.2456 x $15.432655 = $116,412.31). Assume also that the Annuity Unit value for the Variable Portfolio on that same date is $13.256932, and that the Annuity Unit value on the day immediately prior to the second variable annuity income payment date is $13.327695.
The first variable annuity income payment is determined using the annuity factor tables specified in the contract. These tables supply monthly annuity income payment factors, determined by the sex, age of the Annuitant and annuity income option selected, for each $1,000 of applied contract value. If the applicable factor is 5.21 for the annuitant in this hypothetical example, the first variable annuity income payment is determined by multiplying the factor of $5.21 by the result of dividing the account value by $1,000:
First variable annuity income payment =
$5.21 x ($116,412.31/$1000) = $606.51
The number of Annuity Units (which will be constant unless the account values is transferred to another account) is also determined at this time and is equal to the amount of the first variable annuity income payment divided by the value of an Annuity Unit on the day immediately prior to annuitization:
Annuity Units = $606.51/$13.256932 =
45.750404
The second variable annuity income payment is determined by multiplying the number of Annuity Units by the Annuity Unit value as of the day immediately prior to the second variable annuity payment due date:
Second variable annuity income payment = 45.750404 x $13.327695 = $609.75
The third and subsequent variable annuity income
payments are computed in a manner similar to the second variable annuity income payment.
Note that the amount of the first variable annuity income payment depends on the contract value in the relevant Variable Portfolio on the Annuity Date and thus reflects the investment performance of the Variable Portfolio net of fees and charges during the Accumulation Phase. The amount of that payment determines the number of Annuity Units, which will remain constant during the Annuity Phase (assuming no transfers from the Variable Portfolio). The net investment performance of the Variable Portfolio during the Annuity Phase is reflected in continuing changes during this phase in the Annuity Unit value, which determines the amounts of the second and subsequent variable annuity income payments.
Broker-Dealer Firms Receiving Revenue Sharing Payments
The following list includes the names of member firms of FINRA (or their affiliated broker-dealers) that received a revenue sharing payment of more than $15,000 as of the calendar year ending December 31, 2025, from American
General Life Insurance Company and The United States Life Insurance Company in the City of New York, both affiliated companies. Your registered representative can provide you with more information about the
compensation arrangements that apply upon the sale of the
Contract.
| Ameriprise |
MML Investors |
| Centaurus Financial, Inc |
Osaic Institutions, Inc |
| Cetera Advisor Networks LLC |
Osaic Wealth Inc |
| Cetera Advisors LLC |
Primerica |
| Cetera Financial Institutions |
Raymond James & Associates |
| Edward Jones |
Stifel Nicolaus |
| Independent Financial Group |
Wells Fargo Advisors PCG |
| Kestra Investment Services |
Wells Fargo Advisors WBS |
We will update this list annually; interim arrangements may not be reflected. You are encouraged to review the prospectus for each Underlying Fund for any other compensation
arrangements pertaining to the distribution of Underlying Fund
shares.
-7-
Certain broker
dealers with which we have selling agreements are our affiliates. In an effort to promote the sale of our products, affiliated firms may pay their registered
representatives additional cash incentives which may include but are not limited to bonus payments, expense payments, health and retirement benefits or the waiver of
overhead costs or expenses in connection with the sale of the Contracts, that they would not receive in connection with the sale of contracts issued by unaffiliated companies.
Distribution of Contracts
The contracts are offered on a continuous basis through Corebridge Capital Services, Inc., located at 30 Hudson Street, 16th Floor, Jersey City, NJ 07302. Corebridge Capital Services, Inc. (“CCS”) is registered as a broker-dealer under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, and is a member of the Financial Industry Regulatory Authority. CCS is a
wholly-owned
subsidiary of AGL. No underwriting fees are paid in connection with the distribution
of the contracts.
-8-
Financial Statements
PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP, located at 300 Madison Avenue New York, New York, 10017, serves as the independent registered public accounting firm for Variable Annuity Account Five, American General Life Insurance Company (“AGL”), and American Home Assurance Company.
You may obtain a free copy of these financial statements if
you write us at our Annuity Service Center or by calling (855) 421-2692. The financial statements have also been filed with the SEC and can be obtained through its
website at www.sec.gov.
The following financial statements incorporated by reference within the SAI
included on the most recent Form
N-VPFS filed with the SEC have been so incorporated in reliance on the reports of PricewaterhouseCoopers
LLP, an independent registered public accounting firm, given on the authority of said firm as experts in auditing and accounting.
•
The Audited statement of assets and liabilities of Variable Annuity Account Five of American General Life Insurance Company as of December 31, 2025, and the related statements of operations and changes in net assets for each of the two years in the period ended December 31, 2025.
•
The Audited Statutory Financial Statements and Supplemental Information of
American General Life Insurance Company, which comprise the statutory statements of admitted assets, liabilities and capital and surplus as of
December 31, 2025 and December 31,
2024 and the related statutory statements of operations, of changes in capital and surplus, and of cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended
December 31, 2025.
The following financial statements incorporated by reference
within the SAI included on the most recent Form
N-VPFS filed with the SEC have been so incorporated in reliance on the reports of PricewaterhouseCoopers
LLP, an independent registered public accounting firm, given on the authority of said firm as experts in auditing and accounting.
•
The Audited Statutory Basis Financial Statements of American Home Assurance
Company, which comprise the statutory statements of admitted assets, liabilities and capital and surplus as of December 31, 2025
and December 31, 2024, and the related statutory statements of operations, of changes in capital and surplus, and of cash
flows for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2025.
The financial statements of AGL should be considered only as bearing on the ability of AGL to meet its obligation under the contracts.
You should only consider the statutory financial statements of American Home
Assurance Company (“American Home”) that we include in the Statement of Additional Information as a bearing on the ability of American Home, as guarantor, to meet its obligations under the guarantee of insurance obligations under contracts issued prior to December 29, 2006, at 4:00 p.m. Eastern Time (“Point of Termination”). Contracts with an issue date after the Point of Termination are not covered by the American Home guarantee.
-9-
Part C — Other Information
Item 27. Exhibits
| Exhibit
Number |
Description |
Location |
| (a) |
Incorporated by reference to Pre-Effective Amendment No. 1
and Amendment No. 1, File Nos. 333-08859 and 811-07727,
filed on March 11, 1997, Accession
No. 0000912057-97-008516. | |
| (b) |
Custodian Agreements |
Not Applicable |
| (c)(1) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 20
and Amendment No. 20, File Nos. 333-185762 and 811-03859,
filed on April 25, 2019, Accession No.
0001193125-19-119309. | |
| (c)(2) |
Incorporated by reference to Initial Registration Statement, File
Nos. 333-25473 and 811-03859, filed on April 18, 1997,
Accession No. 0000950148-97-000989. | |
| (d)(1) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 9,
File No. 333-08877, filed on September 25, 2000, Accession
No. 0000912057-00-042501. | |
| (d)(2) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 2
and Amendment No. 3, File Nos. 333-08859 and 811-07727,
filed on July 27, 1998, Accession No. 0001047469-98-028410.
| |
| (d)(3) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 9,
File No. 333-08877, filed on September 25, 2000, Accession
No. 0000912057-00-042501. | |
| (d)(4) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 10
and Amendment No. 12, File Nos. 333-58234 and 811-03859,
filed on April 16, 2004, Accession No.
0000950148-04-000752. | |
| (d)(5) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 25
and Amendment No. 26, File Nos. 333-08859 and 811-07727,
filed on May 21, 2004, Accession No.
0000950148-04-000953. | |
| (d)(6) |
Incorporated by reference Post-Effective Amendment No. 26
and Amendment No. 27, File Nos. 333-08859 and 811-07727,
filed on July 20, 2004, Accession No. 0000950129-04-005000.
| |
| (d)(7) |
Incorporated by reference Post-Effective Amendment No. 26
and Amendment No. 27, File Nos. 333-08859 and 811-07727,
filed on July 20, 2004, Accession No. 0000950129-04-005000.
| |
| (d)(8) |
Incorporated by reference Post-Effective Amendment No. 26
and Amendment No. 27, File Nos. 333-08859 and 811-07727,
filed on July 20, 2004, Accession No. 0000950129-04-005000.
| |
| (d)(9) |
Incorporated by reference Post-Effective Amendment No. 26
and Amendment No. 27, File Nos. 333-08859 and 811-07727,
filed on July 20, 2004, Accession No. 0000950129-04-005000.
| |
| (d)(10) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 20
and Amendment No. 22, File Nos. 333-58234 and 811-03859,
filed on September 20, 2005, Accession
No. 0000950129-05-009343. | |
| (d)(11) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 32
and Amendment No. 33, File Nos. 333-08859 and 811-07727,
filed on May 1, 2006, Accession No.
0000950129-06-004661. | |
| (d)(12) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 32
and Amendment No. 33, File Nos. 333-08859 and 811-07727,
filed on May 1, 2006, Accession No.
0000950129-06-004661. | |
| (d)(13) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 17
and Amendment No. 18, File Nos. 333-137867 and 811-03859,
filed on April 27, 2011, Accession No.
0000950123-11-040070. | |
| (d)(14) |
Incorporated by reference to Initial Registration Statement, File
Nos. 333-185762 and 811-03859, filed on January 2, 2013,
Accession No. 0000950123-12-014430. |
| Exhibit
Number |
Description |
Location |
| (d)(15) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 6
and Amendment No. 6, File Nos. 333-185778 and 811-03859,
filed on April 29, 2016, Accession No. 0001193125-16-568418.
| |
| (d)(16) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 6
and Amendment No. 6, File Nos. 333-185778 and 811-03859,
filed on April 29, 2016, Accession No. 0001193125-16-568418.
| |
| (d)(17) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 7
and Amendment No. 7, File Nos. 333-185762 and 811-03859,
filed on April 29, 2016, Accession No. 0001193125-16-568243.
| |
| (e) |
Application for Contract |
|
| (e)(1) |
Incorporated by reference to Pre-Effective Amendment No. 1
and Amendment No. 1, File Nos. 333-08859 and 811-07727,
filed on March 11, 1997, Accession
No. 0000912057-97-008516. | |
| (e)(2) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 9,
File No. 333-08877, filed on September 25, 2000, Accession
No. 0000912057-00-042501. | |
| (e)(3) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 2
and Amendment No. 3, File Nos. 333-08859 and 811-07727,
filed on July 27, 1998, Accession No. 0001047469-98-028410.
| |
| (f) |
Corporate Documents of Insurance Company |
|
| (f)(1) |
Incorporated by reference to Initial Registration Statement on
Form S-1, filed on February 21, 2024, Accession
No. 0001193125-24-040282. | |
| (f)(2) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 11
and Amendment No. 46, File Nos. 333-43264 and 811-08561,
of American General Life Insurance Company Separate
Account VL-R, filed on August 12, 2005, Accession
No. 0001193125-05-165474. | |
| (g) |
Reinsurance Contract |
Not Applicable |
| (h) |
Participation Agreements |
|
| (h)(1) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 2
and Amendment No. 3, File Nos. 333-137892 and 811-03892,
filed on April 26, 2007, Accession No. 0000950148-07-000101.
| |
| (h)(2) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 37
and Amendment No. 38, File Nos. 333-08859 and 811-07727,
filed on August 27, 2008, Accession
No. 0000950137-08-011159. | |
| (h)(3) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 37
and Amendment No. 38, File Nos. 333-08859 and 811-07727,
filed on August 27, 2008, Accession
No. 0000950137-08-011159. | |
| (h)(4) |
Filed Herewith | |
| (h)(5) |
Filed Herewith | |
| (h)(6) |
Incorporated by reference to Initial Registration Statement, File
Nos. 333-185762 and 811-03859, filed on January 2, 2013,
Accession No. 0000950123-12-014430. | |
| (i) |
Administrative Contracts |
Not Applicable |
| (j) |
Other Material Contracts |
|
| (j)(1) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 16 and Amendment No. 17, File Nos. 333-66106 and 811-07727, filed on December 12, 2006, Accession No. 0000950124-06-007496. |
| Exhibit
Number |
Description |
Location |
| (j)(2) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 17
and Amendment No. 18, File Nos. 333-137867 and 811-03859,
filed on April 27, 2011, Accession No.
0000950123-11-040070. | |
| (j)(3) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 3
and Amendment No. 3, File Nos. 333-185778 and 811-03859
filed on April 30, 2014, Accession No. 0000950123-14-004617.
| |
| (j)(4) |
Incorporated by reference to Initial Registration Statement, File
Nos. 333-185762 and 811-03859, filed on January 2, 2013,
Accession No. 0000950123-12-014430. | |
| (j)(5) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 5
and Amendment No. 5, File Nos. 333-185804 and 811-07727,
filed on April 30, 2015, Accession No. 0001193125-15-161285.
| |
| (j)(6) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendments
No. 30 and Amendment No. 31, File Nos. 333-08859 and
811-07727, filed on August 29, 2005, Accession
No. 0000950129-05-008797. | |
| (k)(1) |
Incorporated by reference to Initial Registration Statement, File
Nos. 333-185804 and 811-07727, filed on January 2, 2013,
Accession No. 0000950123-12-014471. | |
| (k)(2) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 18
and Amendment No. 22, File Nos. 333-67685 and 811-07727,
filed on October 21, 2005, Accession
No. 0000950134-05-019473. | |
| (l) |
Filed Herewith | |
| (m) |
Financial Statements Omitted |
None |
| (n) |
Initial Capital Agreement |
Not Applicable |
| (o) |
Form of Initial Summary Prospectus |
Not Applicable |
| (p) |
Power of Attorney |
|
| (p)(1) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 10
to Form N-4, File No. 333-277203, filed on October 24,
2025, Accession No. 0001193125-25-25000. | |
| (p)(2) |
Filed Herewith | |
| (q) |
Letter Regarding Change in Certifying
Accountant |
Not Applicable |
| (r) |
Historical Current Limits on Index Gains |
Not Applicable |
Item 28. Directors and Officers of the Insurance
Company
The directors and principal officers of the American General Life Insurance Company are set forth below. The business address of each officer and director is 2727-A Allen Parkway, 3-D1, Houston, TX 77019, unless otherwise noted.
| Names, Positions and Offices Held with the Insurance Company | |
| Christopher B. Smith (7) |
Director, Chairman of the Board and President |
| Christopher P. Filiaggi (7) |
Director, Senior Vice President and Chief Financial Officer |
| Jonathan J. Novak (1) |
Director, President, Institutional Markets |
| Bryan A. Pinsky (2) |
Director, President, Individual Retirement and Life Insurance |
| Lisa M. Longino (7) |
Director, Executive Vice President and Chief Investment Officer |
| David Ditillo (5) |
Director, Executive Vice President and Chief Information Officer |
| Emily W. Gingrich (4) |
Director, Senior Vice President, Chief Actuary and Corporate Illustration Actuary |
| Eric G. Tarnow |
Director, Senior Vice President, Head of Life Insurance |
| Terri N. Fiedler (3) |
Director |
| Elizabeth B. Cropper (7) |
Executive Vice President and Chief Human Resources Officer |
| Names, Positions and Offices Held with the Insurance Company | |
| John P. Byrne III (3) |
President, Financial Distributor |
| Steven D. (“Doug”) Caldwell, Jr. (7) |
Executive Vice President and Chief Risk Officer |
| Christina M. Haley (2) |
Senior Vice President, Individual Retirement Products |
| Patricia M. Schwartz (2) |
Senior Vice President, Head of Valuation and Financial Reporting, and Appointed Actuary |
| Sai P. Raman (6) |
Senior Vice President, Institutional Markets |
| Mallary L. Reznik (2) |
Senior Vice President, General Counsel and Assistant Secretary |
| Jeannette N. Pina (7) |
Senior Vice President, Corporate Secretary |
| Jonathan A. Gold (7) |
Senior Vice President and Deputy Investment Officer |
| Brigitte K. Lenz |
Vice President and Controller |
| Jennifer Powell (3) |
Vice President and Chief Compliance Officer, and 38a-1 Compliance Officer |
| Brian O. Moon (7) |
Vice President and Treasurer |
| Mersini G. Keller |
Vice President and Tax Officer |
| Angel R. Ramos |
Vice President and Tax Officer |
| Aimy T. Tran (2) |
Vice President, Product Filing |
| Tyra G. Wheatley |
Vice President, Product Filing |
| Korey L. Dalton |
Vice President |
| Christopher J. Hobson (2) |
Vice President |
| Jennifer N. Miller |
Vice President |
| Marjorie D. Brothers (3) |
Assistant Secretary |
| Alison Chen (1) |
Assistant Secretary |
| William Langston (7) |
Assistant Secretary |
| Angela G. Bates (4) |
Anti-Money Laundering and Economic Sanctions Compliance Officer |
| Joey D. Zhou (3) |
Illustration Actuary |
| Michael F. Mulligan (1) |
Head of International Pension Risk Transfer |
| Ethan D. Bronsnick (7) |
Head of U.S. Pension Risk Transfer and Head of Structured Settlements |
| Aileen V. Apuy |
Manager, State Filings |
| Connie C. Merer (1) |
Assistant Manager, State Filings |
| Melissa H. Cozart (3) |
Privacy Officer |
| Thomas Bartolomeo |
Chief Information Security Officer |
(1)
10880 Wilshire Boulevard, Suite 1101, Los Angeles, CA 90024
(2)
21650 Oxnard Street, Suite 750, Woodland Hills, CA 91367
(3)
2919 Allen Parkway, Houston, TX 77019
(4)
1133 Avenue of the Americas, 33rd Floor, New
York, NY 10036
(5)
3211 Shannon Road, Durham, NC 27707
(6)
401 Merritt 7, Norwalk, CT
06851
(7)
30 Hudson Street, Jersey City, NJ 07302
Item 29. Persons Controlled By or Under Common Control with the Insurance Company or the Registered Separate Account
The Registered Separate Account is a separate account of American General Life Insurance Company (“Insurance Company”). The
Insurance Company is an indirect, wholly owned subsidiary of Corebridge Financial, Inc.
(“Corebridge”). An organizational chart for Corebridge can be found as
Exhibit 21 in Corebridge’s Form 10-K, SEC File No. 001-41504, Accession No. 0001889539-26-000022, filed on February 11, 2026. Exhibit 21 is incorporated herein
by reference.
Item 30. Indemnification
Insofar as indemnification for liability arising under the Securities Act of
1933 (“Act”) may be permitted to directors, officers and controlling persons of the Registered Separate Account pursuant to the foregoing provisions, or otherwise, the Registered Separate Account has been advised that in the opinion of the Securities and Exchange Commission such indemnification is against public policy as expressed in the Act and is, therefore, unenforceable. In the event that a claim for indemnification against such liabilities (other than the payment by the Registered Separate Account of expenses incurred or paid by a director,
officer or
controlling person of the Registered Separate Account in the successful defense of any
action, suit or proceeding) is asserted by such director, officer or controlling person in connection with the securities being registered, the Registered Separate Account will, unless in the opinion of its counsel the matter has been settled by controlling precedent, submit to a court of appropriate jurisdiction the question whether such indemnification by it is against public policy as expressed in the Act and will be governed by the final adjudication of such issue.
American General Life Insurance
Company
To the full extent authorized by law, AGL shall indemnify any person made, or threatened to be made, a party to an action or proceeding,
whether criminal or civil, by reason of the fact that he, his testator or intestate is or was a director or officer of the corporation or serves or served in any
capacity in any other corporation at the request of AGL. Nothing contained herein
shall affect any rights to indemnification to which corporate personnel other than directors and officers may be entitled by contract or otherwise under law.
Item 31. Principal Underwriter
(a) Corebridge Capital Services, Inc. acts as distributor for the following investment companies:
American General Life Insurance Company
Variable Separate Account
Variable Annuity Account Five
Variable Annuity Account Seven
Variable Annuity Account Nine
AG Separate Account D
AGL Separate Account I of AGL
AGL Separate Account VL-R
The United States Life Insurance Company in the City of New
York
FS Variable Separate Account
FS Variable Annuity Account Five
USL Separate Account VL-R
USL Separate Account USL A
USL Separate Account RS
The Variable Annuity Life Insurance
Company
Variable Annuity Life Insurance Co Separate Account A
VALIC Company I
(b) Directors, Officers and principal place of business:
| Officer/Directors* |
Position |
| Christina Nasta |
Director, Chairman of the Board, President and Chief Executive Officer |
| John P. Byrne III (1) |
Director |
| Nicholas G. Intrieri |
Director |
| Ryan Tapak |
Director |
| Eric Taylor |
Director |
| Cynthia L. Burnette (1) |
Vice President, Chief Financial Officer, Chief Operations Officer, Treasurer and Controller |
| Michael Fortey (1) |
Chief Compliance Officer |
| Jeannette N. Pina |
Senior Vice President and Corporate Secretary |
| Mersini G. Keller |
Vice President, Tax Officer |
| Anish Cheeran (1) |
Vice President, Tax Officer |
| Angel Ramos (1) |
Vice President, Tax Officer |
| Katarzyna Halasiewicz(1) |
Vice President, Tax Officer |
| Mallary L. Reznik (2) |
Vice President |
| Marjorie Brothers (1) |
Assistant Secretary |
| Allison Chen (2) |
Assistant Secretary |
| William Langston |
Assistant Secretary |
*
Unless otherwise indicated, the principal business address of Corebridge Capital Services, Inc. and of each of the above individuals is 30 Hudson Street, 16th Floor, Jersey City, NJ 07302.
(1) Principal business address 2919 Allen Parkway, Houston, TX 77019
(2) Principal business address 21650 Oxnard Street, Suite 750, Woodland
Hills, CA 91367-4997
(c) Corebridge Capital Services, Inc. retains no compensation or commissions from the Registered
Separate Account.
Item 32. Location of Accounts and Records
All records referenced under Section 31(a) of the 1940 Act, and Rules 31a-1 through 31a-3 thereunder, are maintained and in the custody of American General Life Insurance Company at its principal executive office located at 2727-A Allen Parkway, Houston, Texas 77019-2191 or at American General Life Insurance Company’s Annuity Service Center located at P.O. Box 15570, Amarillo, Texas 79105-5570.
Item 33. Management Services
Not Applicable.
Item 34. Fee Representation and Other
Representations
Fee Representation
Insurance Company represents that the fees and charges to be deducted under the Contracts described in the prospectus
contained in this Registration Statement, in the aggregate, are reasonable in relation to the services rendered, the expenses expected to be incurred, and the risks assumed by Insurance Company in accordance with Section 26(f)(2)(A) of the Investment Company Act of 1940.
Other Representations
The Registered Separate Account hereby represents that it is relying on the No-Action Letter issued by
the Division of Investment Management to the American Council of Life Insurance dated November 28, 1988 (Commission Ref. No. IP-6-88). Registered Separate Account has complied with conditions one through four on the No-Action
Letter.
SIGNATURES
Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933 and the Investment
Company Act of 1940, the Registrant, Variable Annuity Account Five, certifies that it meets all of the requirements for effectiveness of this registration statement under rule 485(b) under the Securities Act and has duly caused this registration statement to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, duly authorized, in the City of Jersey City, and State of New Jersey on this
27th day of April, 2026.
Variable Annuity Account Five
(Registered
Separate Account)
BY: AMERICAN GENERAL LIFE
INSURANCE COMPANY
(On behalf of the Registered Separate Account and itself)
(On behalf of the Registered Separate Account and itself)
BY: * CHRISTOPHER P. FILIAGGI
CHRISTOPHER P. FILIAGGI
DIRECTOR, SENIOR VICE PRESIDENT AND CHIEF FINANCIAL OFFICER
CHRISTOPHER P. FILIAGGI
DIRECTOR, SENIOR VICE PRESIDENT AND CHIEF FINANCIAL OFFICER
Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, this registration statement has been signed by the following persons in the capacities and on the dates indicated.
| Signature |
Title |
Date |
| *CHRISTOPHER B. SMITH CHRISTOPHER B. SMITH |
Director, Chairman of the Board and President (Principal Executive Officer) |
April 27, 2026 |
| | ||
| *CHRISTOPHER P. FILIAGGI CHRISTOPHER P. FILIAGGI |
Director, Senior Vice President, and Chief Financial Officer (Principal Financial Officer) (Principal Accounting Officer) |
April 27, 2026 |
| | ||
| *TERRI N. FIEDLER TERRI N. FIEDLER |
Director |
April 27, 2026 |
| | ||
| *EMILY W. GINGRICH EMILY W. GINGRICH |
Director |
April 27, 2026 |
| | ||
| *LISA M. LONGINO LISA M. LONGINO |
Director |
April 27, 2026 |
| | ||
| *JONATHAN J. NOVAK JONATHAN J. NOVAK |
Director |
April 27, 2026 |
| | ||
| *BRYAN A. PINSKY BRYAN A. PINSKY |
Director |
April 27, 2026 |
| | ||
| *ERIC G. TARNOW ERIC G. TARNOW |
Director |
April 27, 2026 |
| | ||
| *BY: /s/ TRINA SANDOVAL
TRINA SANDOVAL
Attorney-in-Fact pursuant to Powers
of Attorney filed previously and/or
herewith. |
|
April 27,
2026 |
SIGNATURES
American Home Assurance Company has caused this amended registration statement to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, duly authorized, in the City of Wilton, and State of Connecticut on the 27th day of April,
2026.
AMERICAN HOME ASSURANCE COMPANY
(Guarantor)
(Guarantor)
BY: /s/ BRIAN RUCKER
BRIAN RUCKER
SENIOR VICE PRESIDENT AND STATUTORY CONTROLLER
BRIAN RUCKER
SENIOR VICE PRESIDENT AND STATUTORY CONTROLLER
This amended registration statement has been signed below by the following persons in the capacities and on the
dates indicated.
| Signature |
Title |
Date |
| *BARBARA LUCK BARBARA LUCK |
Director, President, Chief Executive Officer, and Chairman of the Board of Directors (Principal Executive Officer) |
April 27, 2026 |
| | ||
| *SHELLEY SINGH SHELLEY SINGH |
Director, Chief Financial Officer and Senior Vice President (Principal Financial Officer) |
April 27, 2026 |
| | ||
| *ALLISON COOPER ALLISON COOPER |
Director |
April 27, 2026 |
| | ||
| *MOHAMMAD ABU TURAB HUSSAIN MOHAMMAD ABU TURAB HUSSAIN |
Director |
April 27, 2026 |
| | ||
| *JOHN F. KLAUS JOHN F. KLAUS |
Director |
April 27, 2026 |
| | ||
| *DARREN MEYLER DARREN MEYLER |
Director |
April 27, 2026 |
| | ||
| *KEITH WALSH KEITH WALSH |
Director |
April 27, 2026 |
| | ||
| *BY: /s/ BRIAN RUCKER
BRIAN RUCKER
Attorney-in-Fact
(Exhibit to the Registration
Statement) |
|
April 27,
2026 |
ATTACHMENTS / EXHIBITS
SEASONS SERIES TRUST FUND PARTICIPATION AGREEMENT
SUNAMERICA SERIES TRUST FUND PARTICIPATION AGREEMENT
CONSENT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM
POWER OF ATTORNEY - AMERICAN HOME ASSURANCE COMPANY DIRECTORS
Serious News for Serious Traders! Try StreetInsider.com Premium Free!
You May Also Be Interested In
- Circle K and AriZona Beverages Celebrate America’s 250th Birthday with Exclusive New Patriotic Punch
- Frontline Justice Begins Nationwide Rollout of 'Frontline Q' with Josef
- DP World Advances Climate Action Through Verified Carbon Offsets Supporting Grassland Restoration in Mexico
Create E-mail Alert Related Categories
SEC FilingsSign up for StreetInsider Free!
Receive full access to all new and archived articles, unlimited portfolio tracking, e-mail alerts, custom newswires and RSS feeds - and more!



Tweet
Share